JP2011147754A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine effectively attracting more attention to a game. <P>SOLUTION: When a game ball enters an upper operation hole 33 or a lower operation hole 34, suspension information according to the operation hole which the game ball enters is stored in a main control device. Variable display of symbols is started in a symbol display device 41 based on the reservation information. When the variable display is started and when a game balls enters the operation hole 33 or 34, the main control device executes a winning determination process. At the time, when the total number of suspension, the total number of suspension information stored in respective suspension areas, is larger than 4 while the mode is shifted to an opening/closing execution mode, first suspension advance notice presentation reflecting the content of the suspension information is executed in the opening/closing execution mode. Alternatively, when the total number of suspension is not more than 4, second suspension advance notice presentation with longer presentation time than the first suspension advance notice presentation is executed. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to a predetermined gaming state such as a big hit gaming state is triggered by the fact that a gaming ball has entered the start ball entering section provided in the gaming area. Done. Further, for example, in the display device provided in the game area, the display of the variation of the picture is started based on the fact that the lottery has been performed, and a stop result corresponding to the lottery result is displayed in the final stop display of the variation display. A display effect corresponding to one game is displayed. In addition, when the lottery result is a so-called jackpot gaming state transition winning, opening and closing of a variable pitching device provided in a gaming area, for example, is executed after a display effect for one game is executed, The game balls are paid out according to the number of balls entered into the variable pitching device.

  In addition, when a game ball enters the starting entrance part while the display of the change of the pattern is being performed, information used for the winning lottery is held and stored with a predetermined number (for example, 4) as an upper limit. There are pachinko machines that are designed to be used. In the case of hold storage, after the display of the variation of the pattern is completed, a winning lottery is performed using the information stored and stored, and the next variation display of the pattern is started (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, a game in which a game ball is fired so that a ball enters the starting pitching part, and a lottery result when a ball enters the starting pitching part is hit. It can be said that it consists of a game of confirming whether or not. With respect to the former game, the player pays attention to whether or not the starting ball entering portion occurs until the upper limit of the reserved memory is reached, and with respect to the latter game, the variation display mode of the pattern However, the player pays attention to whether or not it is likely to be a stop result corresponding to winning the transition to the jackpot gaming state.

JP 2004-81853 A

  Here, in the gaming machine, it is necessary to increase the degree of attention to the game by diversifying the game. In order to diversify such games, in the game of firing game balls as described above, a method of diversifying the flow mode of game balls in the game area can be considered, and lottery is performed for each game as described above. In the game of confirming whether or not the result is successful, a method of diversifying the display pattern of the display effect performed every game time is conceivable.

  However, since the game area is limited for the former, there is a limit in trying to diversify the game, and for the latter, even if the display pattern for each game is diversified, attention to the game There is still a limit in terms of increasing the degree. Therefore, there is still room for improvement in increasing the degree of attention to games. This point applies not only to pachinko machines but also to other game machines in which display effects are executed.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of favorably increasing the degree of attention to a game.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the information acquisition means for acquiring special information and the special information acquired by the information acquisition means are determined in advance as a plurality of numbers based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition. Acquisition information storage means for storing the specified number as an upper limit, and special information stored in the acquisition information storage means, whether or not granting determination as to whether or not it corresponds to preset grant information, When a plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, a grant determination unit that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order, and a grant determination by the grant determination unit A transition means for shifting the gaming state to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player based on the result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the granting information. In the gaming machine equipped with the information, the information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant, the predetermined special information is the target of the determination of grant The specific information reflecting the specific result by the destination specifying means and the destination specifying means specified at the timing before the predetermined, and the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means is the target of the grant determination Special notification control means to be executed by the notification means at a timing prior to the special notification control means, the special notification control means being stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state The special notification is performed for the information, and the execution period for executing the special notification for the special information is determined after the special information is finished in the specific gaming state. Depending on whether or not the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant correspondence result in the execution period, the special notification is executed. Alternatively, it includes a specific control unit that changes a frequency of execution of a special notification as a predetermined notification mode, and the special notification during the specific gaming state by the specific control unit is stored in the acquired information storage in a situation where the specific gaming state is shifted to the specific gaming state. It is executed when the number of special information stored in the means is larger than a predetermined specific number, while the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. It is not executed when the number is equal to or less than the specific number.

  The degree of attention to the game can be increased well.

The front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The perspective view which expand | deploys and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content in the display screen of a symbol display apparatus. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a lottery determination. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a success / failure table. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. The flowchart which shows the timer interruption process in MPU of a main controller. The flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. The flowchart which shows an information acquisition process. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows game times control processing. The flowchart which shows a data setting process. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation start process. The flowchart which shows a 1st game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows a big prize opening / closing process. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode. The flowchart which shows a 2nd game state transfer process. The block diagram which shows the electrical structure of an audio | voice lamp control apparatus and a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for 1st pending | holding notice. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for 2nd pending | holding notice. The flowchart which shows the matching information reception process in MPU of a display control apparatus. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. The flowchart which shows the display process during the round for special effects. Explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a hold notice is performed. The timing chart which shows a mode in case a special effect is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the allocation table in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of the opening / closing execution mode in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 1st reservation notice in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 2nd reservation notice in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the coincidence information reception process in 2nd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a fluctuation | variation display control process. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start. The flowchart which shows a deviation variation aspect setting process. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation start process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows special game times setting processing. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for the 1st reservation notice in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display control process in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for a fluctuation | variation start in 3rd Embodiment. The flowchart which shows the process for fluctuation | variation in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing which shows a mode that a special effect is performed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the distribution table in 6th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a normal process. The flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. The flowchart which shows the confirmation process for a hold notice. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating normal round production. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a reservation notice effect. The timing chart for demonstrating a round production. The flowchart which shows the round production | presentation determination process in 7th Embodiment. The flowchart which shows a round display start process. An explanatory view for explaining the 2nd reservation notice production. The timing chart for demonstrating a 2nd special round effect.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing an unfolded main configuration of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting a wooden plate or the like to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. It is said that. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, a backpack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and when viewed from the front, the left side is the rotation base end side and the right side is the rotation front end side. It is possible to move.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 16 at its rotating tip, and the gaming machine main body 12 is locked to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. And has a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that the front door frame 14 cannot be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 21 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 23 is formed at the center of the resin base 21. A game board 24 is detachably attached to the resin base 21. The game board 24 is made of plywood, and a game area formed on the front surface of the game board 24 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 23 of the resin base 21.

  Here, the structure of the game board 24 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 24 is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening has a general winning port 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating port (first starting ball entering portion or a non-priority starting entering ball portion) 33, a lower operating port (second starting ball entering portion or a priority starting ball) Part) 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a main display part 43, an accessory display part 44, and the like.

  On the back side of the game board 24, detection sensors (not shown) are provided in correspondence with the general winning port 31, the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34. When a ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operating port 33, and the lower operating port 34, it is detected by a corresponding detection sensor, and a predetermined number of award balls are paid out based on the detection result. . In this case, 10 game balls are paid out when the general winning opening 31 is entered, and 15 game balls are paid out when the variable winning device 32 is entered. Is executed, three game balls are paid out when a ball enters the upper working port 33, and four game balls are paid out when a ball enters the lower working port 34. Is executed.

  In addition, an out port 37 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 37. The game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 38 in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode of being discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. Embodiments that are not included are also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 37, the game ball enters the variable winning device 32, the upper operation port 33, the lower operation port 34, or the through gate 35. Is also expressed as a prize.

  The upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34 are unitized as an operating port device and are installed in the game board 24. Both the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction, more specifically in the vertical direction, with the upper operation port 33 facing upward. The lower working port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a as a guide piece made up of a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric accessory 34a will be described. The electric accessory 34a has a closed state (a non-supported state or a non-guided state) in which a game ball is difficult to win in the lower operating port 34, and an open state (a supported state or a guided state) in which a game ball is more likely to win than in the closed state. Can be switched to.

  The operating port case constituting the upper operating port 33 projects to the front side and has a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and the upper side length <the lower side length. At this time, the upper side length of the operating port case (that is, the left and right width of the upper operating port 33) is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the lower side length is left and right when the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state. The length is larger than the distance between the electric accessories 34a. In addition, when the electric accessory 34a is in a closed state, the installation interval between both the operating ports 33 and 34 is set so that the distance between the operating port case and the upper end of the electric accessory 34a is slightly shorter than the diameter of the game ball. It has been adjusted.

  According to the above configuration, in the closed state of the electric accessory 34a, the game ball cannot win the lower operation port 34, and the electric operation item 34a is opened, so that the lower operation port 34 can be won. In particular, at this time, in the middle of the operation in which the electric accessory 34a shifts from the closed state to the open state, the operating port case of the upper operating port 33 has a substantially trapezoidal shape as described above. Until the object 34a is fully opened, it is impossible to win a game ball in the lower operating port 34, and it is possible to win only when the electric accessory 34a is almost fully open. That is, the game ball that has dropped from above hits the side surface of the operating port case 33a and is bounced outward, and does not win the lower operating port 34 directly. As a result, when the electric accessory 34a is opened in a very short time, it is extremely difficult to win the lower working port 34, and only when the open state of the electric accessory 34a is continued, the lower working port 34 is opened. Winning is easy.

  Furthermore, as described above, the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 are arranged side by side. More specifically, since they are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, the game balls flowing down toward the upper side of the operating port device are the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port. Any of the mouths 34 can be won. In other words, when the electric accessory 34a is in an open state, it is difficult to aim for winning in the upper working port 33 and winning in the lower working port 34 depending on the operation mode of the firing handle 54 described later. It has become.

  In addition to the configuration in which the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 is substantially trapezoidal as described above, the operation port case of the upper operation port 33 has a two-stage configuration having a narrow upper width and a lower width, A substantially C-shaped guide piece may be provided on each of the left and right sides, or an obstruction nail may be implanted obliquely below the operating port case.

  The variable winning device 32 includes a large winning opening 32a that leads to the back side of the game board 24, and an open / close door 32b that opens and closes the large winning opening 32a. The open / close door 32b is connected to a drive unit such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 24, and is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won or are difficult to win. When winning the (open / closed execution state), the game ball is switched to a predetermined open state in which it is easier to win than in the closed state.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. The opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail later. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 32, the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit. There is an embodiment.

  The main display portion 43 and the accessory display portion 44 are provided on a decorative member 39 disposed along the outer edge on the lower side of the game area. The decorative member 39 extends from the board surface of the game board 24 to the front of the pachinko machine 10. More specifically, the front surface of the decorative member 39 faces the window panel 62 provided on the front door frame 14 so that the game area can be viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10. The distance between them is narrower than that of one game ball. This prevents the game ball from falling in front of the front surface of the decorative member 39.

  A main display unit 43 and an accessory display unit 44 are provided so as to be exposed from the front surface of the decorative member 39. That is, the main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 62 of the front door frame 14, and a game ball is in front of both the display units 43 and 44. It is prevented from falling.

  In the main display section 43, when the variable winning device 32 enters the opening / closing execution mode (or when the opening / closing execution mode is set) by winning the big win, the big winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode is displayed. The round display part RS for clearly indicating the number of times of opening, the first result display part AS for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating opening 33, and the lower operating opening 34 A second result display section BS is set for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning.

  In the round display section RS, the display of the number of times of opening is started when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and the display is ended when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In the first result display section AS, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 33 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 33 is performed. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 33 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the second result display section BS, the variation display of the picture is performed with the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a trigger, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result is clearly indicated by the display. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 34 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the second result display unit BS and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, on the basis of winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the corresponding result display sections AS, BS, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the above variable display is stopped. It corresponds to one game time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single result display unit is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 33 and 34 is won, the single game display is provided. In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the result display unit, the variable display is started in the single result display unit, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped in a state where the predetermined stop result is displayed. 1 time.

  The accessory display unit 44 is a display unit for clearly indicating the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning through the through gate 35. In this case, the accessory display unit 44 displays a variation of the picture triggered by the winning of the through gate 35, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 35 as a result of stopping the variation display. The result of is clearly displayed. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 35 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the state where the electric role is opened, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the accessory display unit 44 and displayed in a variable manner. After is stopped, it shifts to the electric utility open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The main display unit 43 and the accessory display unit 44 are configured by a segment display device having a plurality of segments. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and other display devices such as a liquid crystal display device are used. Also good.

  The variable display unit 36 is provided with a symbol display device 41 that performs variable display (or variable display or switching display) of symbols. The variable display unit 36 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. The center frame 42 has an upper portion extending forward of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, the game ball is prevented from dropping in front of the display screen of the symbol display device 41, and the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen is lowered due to the fall of the game ball does not occur. .

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. In this case, the change display on the symbol display device 41 is started based on winning in the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. That is, when the variable display is performed in the first result display unit AS, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly, and when the variable display is performed in the second result display unit BS, In addition, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display. Then, for example, the symbol display device 41 is set in advance as a game time for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 15 rounds, in which the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is opened 15 times as the opening / closing execution mode. A predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  A first holding lamp portion 45 corresponding to the first result display portion AS and the symbol display device 41 is provided in the upper left portion on the front side of the center frame 42. The maximum number of game balls won in the upper operation port 33 is reserved, and the number of reserved balls is displayed when the first reservation lamp unit 45 is turned on. Further, a second holding lamp portion 46 corresponding to the second result display portion BS and the symbol display device 41 is provided at the upper right portion on the front side of the center frame 42. A maximum of four game balls won in the lower operation port 34 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed when the second reservation lamp unit 46 is turned on. As described above, since the upper portion of the center frame 42 extends forward of the pachinko machine 10, the visibility of the first holding ramp portion 45 and the second holding ramp portion 46 is not hindered by the fall of the game ball. ing.

  Below the center frame 42, a third holding lamp portion 47 corresponding to the accessory display portion 44 is provided. The number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 35 is held up to a maximum of 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by turning on the third holding lamp portion 47. In addition, the structure etc. by which each holding lamp | ramp parts 45-47 are displayed on a part of symbol display apparatus 41 may be sufficient.

  A special display device 48 is provided above the center frame. The special display device 48 is used for executing a special effect. Specifically, the special display device 48 is provided with an LED and a speaker. When the special effect is executed, the LED emits light or a sound is output from the speaker.

  An inner rail portion 51 and an outer rail portion 52 are attached to the game board 24, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 51 and the outer rail portion 52. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 53 is attached below the window hole 23 in the resin base 21. The game ball launching mechanism 53 is operated by operating a firing handle 54 provided on the front door frame 14. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 61 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 61 has a substantially elliptical shape, and the window panel 62 described above is fitted therein. Although the window panel 62 is colorless and transparent with glass, the window panel 62 is not limited to this and may be colorless and transparent with synthetic resin.

  Around the window portion 61, light emitting means such as various lamp portions are provided. A display lamp part 63 is provided above the window part 61 as a part of the various lamp parts. In addition, on both the left and right sides of the display lamp unit 63, speaker units 64 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 61 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 65 and a lower bulging portion 66 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper pan 71 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 65, and a lower pan 72 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 66. The upper plate 71 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism 53 side while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 72 has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 71. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 of the back pack unit 15 are discharged to the upper plate 71 and the lower plate 72 through a passage forming unit 73 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a main controller 81 and an audio lamp controller 82 are mounted on the back of the inner frame 13 (specifically, the game board 24).

  The main control device 81 includes a main control board that controls the main control of the game and a power failure monitoring board that monitors the power source. The main control board and the power failure monitoring board are provided in a board box 83 made of a transparent resin material or the like. Contained and configured. The board box 83 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other in a non-separable manner by a box coupling portion 85 as a separation preventing means (or a coupling means), thereby sealing the substrate box 83. And by being connected inseparably by these box coupling | bond parts 85, when the internal space of the board | substrate box 83 is open | released, it has the structure which needs destruction of the said board | substrate box 83 or a part of excision. A plurality of box coupling portions 85 are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 83, and at least one of them is used for the coupling process.

  The box coupling portion 85 can be applied to any configuration as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened, but by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the box coupling portion 85, The box cover is connected to the box cover so that it cannot be opened. The coupling process by the box coupling unit 85 prevents unauthorized opening after the coupling, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. Even after the opening, it is possible to perform the opening process again. That is, the coupling process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of box coupling portions 85. When the board box 83 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the box coupling portion 85 into which the locking claw is inserted and the other box coupling portion 85 The connecting part of the box and the connecting part with the box body are cut. Thereby, the box base and the box cover of the board box 83 are separated, and the internal main control board can be taken out. Thereafter, when the coupling process is performed again, the locking claw is inserted into the long hole of the other box coupling portion 85. If the history of opening the board box 83 is left in the board box 83, it can be easily found that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 83.

  A plurality of coupling pieces 86 are provided on one short side of the substrate box 83 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces 86 have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces 87 formed on the mounting base of the main control device 81, and the board box 83 and the mounting base are formed by the coupling pieces 86 and the coupled pieces 87. Between them.

  In addition, as a trace means for discovering unauthorized opening of the substrate box 83, a seal seal may be attached so as to straddle the boundary between the box base and the box cover. In this case, when the seal seal is peeled off from the pasted portion, the adhesive layer of the seal seal remains on the substrate box 83 side, and the trace remains. Further, an IC tag that transmits a response wave including identification information to the ringing wave having a predetermined frequency is provided on the seal sticker. When the seal sticker is peeled off, the antenna of the IC tag is cut and the response It is good also as a structure which cannot transmit a wave.

  The sound lamp control device 82 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to an instruction from the main control device 81. The sound lamp control board is made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 84 is configured to be accommodated.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 91, and a payout mechanism 92 and a control device assembly unit 93 are attached to the back pack 91. The back pack 91 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a protective cover portion 94 that protrudes rearward and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape so as to cover the main control device 81, the sound lamp control device 82, and the like from the rear. is doing.

  The payout mechanism portion 92 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 94, and a tank 95 to which game balls supplied from island facilities in the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 95. A payout device 96 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 96 are discharged to the upper plate 71 or the lower plate 72 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 96. Further, the payout mechanism 92 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for turning on and off the power is provided.

  Further, the back pack 91 is provided with an external output terminal plate 99 on the rotation axis side of the back pack unit 15 and on the upper edge side. The external output terminal plate 99 has an output terminal for outputting a signal when there is a shortage of game balls in the tank 95 or the like, an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out, and a predetermined number of game balls. State transition such as an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a loan is made, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the gaming machine body 12 is opened, an output terminal for outputting a signal when the front door frame 14 is opened, and an opening / closing execution mode At this time (or during the transition to the state), an output terminal for outputting a signal is provided. And the signal regarding the state of a frame side is output with respect to the management control apparatus of the game hall side through these output terminals. Note that an output terminal for outputting a signal every time a predetermined number of game balls are lent out is not necessary in a so-called cash machine.

  The control device assembly unit 93 includes a payout control device 97 and a power source and launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 and the power supply / launch control device 98 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 97 is located behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 97 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 96 is accommodated in a substrate box. In this case, fraud suppression means similar to the substrate box 83 of the main control device 81 may be applied to the substrate box of the payout control device 97.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is configured such that a power source and launch control board is accommodated in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the firing handle 54 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 202 is mounted on the main control board 201 provided in the main control device 81. The MPU 202 includes a ROM 203 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 202 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 203 is executed. It is an element incorporating a RAM 204, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 202, for example, the function of the ROM 203 and the function of the RAM 204 may be provided as separate elements.

  The MPU 202 is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205 provided in the main control device 81, a payout control device 97, various detection sensors 211a to 211e, and the like are connected. In this case, a power supply and launch control device 98 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 205, and power is supplied to the MPU 202 via the power failure monitoring board 205. Also, as a part of the various detection sensors 211a to 211e, a winning winning entry portion (a payout corresponding entering portion) such as a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, an upper operating opening 33, a lower operating opening 34, a through gate 35, etc. Are connected to each other, and the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 202 executes a lottery occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34, and also performs support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the MPU 202, a power failure monitoring board 205, a payout control device 97, and an audio lamp control device 82 are connected. For example, the payout control device 97 outputs a winning ball command based on the winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 31 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to payout of 10 game balls is output, and when a winning to the variable winning device 32 is specified, 15 winning balls are output. When a winning ball command corresponding to paying out a game ball is output and a winning to the upper operating port 33 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out three gaming balls is output and sent to the lower operating port 34. When a winning is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the sound lamp control device 82. In this case, the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203 is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 202, a variable winning drive unit 32c that opens and closes the open / close door 32b of the variable winning device 32, an electric combination drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, and a main display. The unit 43 is connected. The main control board 201 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 202 performs drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, drive control of the variable winning drive unit 32c is executed in the MPU 202 so that the special winning opening 32a is opened and closed. Further, when the electric combination 34a is won, the MPU 202 performs drive control of the electric combination drive unit 34b so that the electric combination 34a is opened and closed. In each game round, the display control of the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the main display section 43 is executed in the MPU 202, and the main display section is operated in the opening / closing execution mode of the variable winning device 32. Display control of the round display part RS in 43 is executed.

  The power failure monitoring board 205 relays between the main control board 201 and the power supply / launch control device 98, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / launch control device 98. The payout control device 97 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 96 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 81.

  The power source and launch control device 98 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 201 and the payout control device 97, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power source and launch control device 98 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 53, and the game ball launch mechanism 53 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control device 82 is based on various commands input from the main control device 81, the holding lamp portions 45 to 47 provided in the variable display unit 36, the display lamp portion 63 provided in the front door frame 14, and a speaker. The unit 64 is driven and controlled, and the display control device 212 is controlled. The display control device 212 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on the command input from the sound lamp control device 82.

  Here, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a display screen G of the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 6 (a), on the display screen G of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. . In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display screen G, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity. Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the display screen G is configured such that three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It has come to be.

  The display screen G has five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the variation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, when a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same specific symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed.

  On the left side of the lower part of the display screen G, a hold display area Ga is set. The hold display area Ga is divided and displayed so that unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 of the same number as the maximum hold number when a game ball wins the upper operation opening 33 and the lower operation opening 34 are arranged in parallel in the left-right direction. Has been. Specifically, the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball wins the upper working port 33 is four, and the maximum number of reserved balls when the game ball wins the lower working port 34 is four. Correspondingly, the hold display area Ga includes a first unit hold display area Ga1, a second unit hold display area Ga2, a third unit hold display area Ga3, a fourth unit hold display area Ga4, and a fifth unit hold display area. Ga5, sixth unit hold display area Ga6, seventh unit hold display area Ga7, and eighth unit hold display area Ga8 are set.

  For example, when the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 0, and the number of hold when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 1, the first unit hold display area A predetermined hold image is displayed only by Ga1. When the number of holds when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is 0, and when the number of holds when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 is 4, the first unit hold display area Ga1 to Ga1 A predetermined hold image is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4.

  Further, for example, when the number of holdings when a game ball wins the lower working port 34 and the number of holdings when a game ball wins the upper working port 33 are each one, the first unit hold display Predetermined hold images are displayed in the area Ga1 and the second unit hold display area Ga2. When a hold image is displayed in each hold display area, the upper operation is performed so that the player can distinguish which of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 the game ball has won. When a game ball wins in the mouth 33, a red hold image is displayed, and when a game ball wins in the lower operation port 34, a blue hold image is displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the hold images are displayed in the order in which the game balls win the respective operation ports 33 and 34. For example, when the game ball wins in the order of the upper operating port 33 → the lower operating port 34 → the upper operating port 33, a holding image corresponding to winning in the upper operating port 33 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Ga 1. In the second unit hold display area Ga2, a hold image corresponding to winning in the lower operation port 34 is displayed, and in the third unit hold display area Ga3, a hold image corresponding to winning in the upper operation port 33 is displayed. The

<About various counters>
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

  The MPU 202 uses lots of counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 43, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 41, setting of display of the accessory display unit 44, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7, when the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery occurrence lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and the symbol display device 41 are changed. Reach random number counter C3 used for reach lottery, random number initial value counter CINI used for initial value setting of jackpot random number counter C1, first result display section AS and second result display section BS of main display section 43, and design The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time in the display device 41 is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 34a of the lower working port 34 is in the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter area 231 of the RAM 204.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals. The updated value is appropriately stored in the RAM 204 based on the game ball winning in each of the operation ports 33 and 34.

  The RAM 204 includes an acquisition information storage unit including a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, an execution area AE, a reservation number storage area CR, and an order storage area OR. The reserved ball storage area 232 is provided. In the reserved ball storage area 232, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 are time-sequentially matched to the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33 or the lower working port 34. It is designed to be stored.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 99). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 221 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 203. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the success / failure table, address information composed of binary number information and jackpot numerical value information composed of binary number information are set in a one-to-one correspondence. Specifically, ten types of address information expressed in decimal numbers “1” to “10” are set, and the jackpot value information is expressed in decimal numbers “7”, “11”, “23”. , “31”, “47”, “59”, “67”, “73”, “83”, “91” are set, and the address information and the jackpot value information are in a one-to-one relationship. It is associated. The numerical value of each jackpot numerical value information is included in “0” to “99”, which is the numerical range of the random number information that can be updated in the jackpot random number counter C1.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery modes in the success / failure lottery means. The number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the low probability mode is different from the number of jackpot numerical information referred to in the high probability mode, and the former is smaller than the latter. Specifically, in the low probability mode, only the jackpot value information whose address information is “1” is referred to in the lottery lottery, and in the high probability mode, the jackpot number information corresponding to all the address information is determined in the lottery lottery. Referenced. In other words, there is one piece of numerical information for winning the jackpot in the low probability mode, and there are ten pieces of numerical information in the high probability mode, which is more than in the low probability mode. As a result, the probability of winning a big hit in the low probability mode is 1/100, whereas the probability of winning a big hit in the high probability mode is 1/10, and the high probability mode is a big hit than the low probability mode. The probability of winning is increased. Note that the success / failure tables referred to in the high probability mode and the low probability mode may be different. In this case, a success / failure table referred to in the case of the high probability mode and a success / failure table referred to in the case of the low probability mode may be set in advance.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the condition of the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the 16R probability variation jackpot result in which the open / close execution mode is opened and closed 16 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode and the open / close opening of the open / close execution mode is performed 6 times from the start to the end of the open / close execution mode. 6R probability variation jackpot result is set. In the opening / closing execution mode, one opening / closing of the big prize opening 32a is set as one round, and one opening of the big prize opening 32a is made until 30 seconds (high frequency time) elapses or to the big prize opening 32a. This is continued until the number of winnings reaches 10 (high frequency).

  In the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until the predetermined number of games has elapsed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until five game times have elapsed, and the low probability mode is set thereafter.

  As a support mode for the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34, the electric combination 34a of the lower working port 34 is compared when the game ball is continuously being fired in the same manner with respect to the game area. Low frequency support mode (low frequency support state or low frequency guide state) and high frequency support mode (high frequency support state or high frequency guide state) so that the frequency of the open state per unit time is relatively high or low. And are set.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric combination release lottery using the electric combination release counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high-frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 34a is opened when the electrified open state is won is set more than in the low-frequency support mode, and one more release is performed. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 34a occurs a plurality of times, the closure from the end of one open state until the start of the next open state is performed. The time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Has been.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning a prize for the lower working port 34 than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that a prize will be given to the upper working port 33 than to the lower working port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the lower working port 34 is connected to the lower working port 34. The probability of winning a prize increases. When a winning is made to the lower working port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which raises the probability of becoming electrified in the electric character open state in Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the minimum secured time is secured when the next electric character opening lottery is performed after one electric character releasing lottery is performed. By applying any one condition or any combination of conditions (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the display part 44 for an accessory) and increasing the winning probability, the low frequency support mode is applied. The advantage of the high frequency support mode may be increased.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set until a predetermined number of games have elapsed. Specifically, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high-frequency support mode is set as the support mode until 50 game times have elapsed, and the low-frequency support mode is set thereafter.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 222 as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 203. The contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the distribution table, a 6R probability variation jackpot result and a 16R probability variation jackpot result are set as distribution destinations of game results. When each jackpot result is obtained, the open / close execution mode is set. Further, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until the end reference count elapses. As described above, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode until five game times less than the number of games for which the high frequency support mode is set elapses. For this reason, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until 5 game times elapse, and the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set until 50 game times elapse thereafter. Thereafter, the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode are set.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to the above gaming states refers to a state in which the winning / losing lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 26” corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and “27 to 29” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. Yes. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In addition, when it becomes a losing result in the success / failure lottery, the opening / closing execution mode is not shifted, and the change of the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode does not occur.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 232 of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33 or the lower operation port 34. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 33, and the second result display unit of the RAM 204 at the timing when the game ball wins the lower operation port 34. Stored in the reserved area Rb. Then, based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 203, it is determined whether to generate a reach. However, in the game times that shift to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 202 determines the occurrence of reach regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display is the same in each gaming state, but may be set individually according to the gaming state. For example, when the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of reach display may be set larger than that in the low frequency support mode.

  Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 41 capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of symbols (pictures), and in the game times that are in the opening / closing execution mode, stop after the variable display. In the gaming machine in which the display result is the special display result, the special display result is obtained before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture) in the symbol display device 41 is started. This means a display state for making the player think that it is a variable display state that is likely to become.

  In other words, the combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol sequences displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a combination of reach symbols that may be displayed is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows.

  More specifically, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is established on a preset active line in the display screen of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that may possibly be displayed, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol row in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents in FIG. 6 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any one of the effective items is displayed. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. Reach display. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  In the reach display, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed on the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. There are those that produce an effect, and those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on almost the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. Further, when reach display is performed or before reach display, it is determined using the reach random number counter C3 or other counter whether or not to perform a notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character. May be.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used in the MPU 202 to determine the variation display time in the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS of the main display unit 43 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. . The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS and at the variation start of the symbol by the symbol display device 41.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric combination holding area 233 of the RAM 204 at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state based on the value of the stored electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, the MPU 202 uses at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS to determine the variation display time in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. A variable display time table storage area 223 is used. Further, the MPU 202 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE to determine the stop results in the first result display section AS and the second result display section BS. However, the stop result table storage area 224 of the ROM 203 is used for the determination.

  Here, the configuration of the reserved ball storage area 232 will be described.

  The first result display section holding area Ra stores the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the upper working port 33. Is a reserved area for In addition, the second result display section holding area Rb displays the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 in time series in accordance with the winning history of the game balls to the lower operating port 34. This is a reserved area for storing. Here, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb have the same configuration, the first result display area of the both reservation areas Ra and Rb will be described below. The configuration of the reserved area Ra will be described.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra includes four storage areas of a first area to a fourth area, and a reservation number storage area. Each storage area includes a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, a storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and a storage area for storing the value of the reach random number counter C3. It is configured. With the four storage areas of the first area to the fourth area, up to four game balls winning histories to the upper operation port 33 are stored on hold.

  In addition, in the reserved ball storage area 232, a reserved number storage for storing information on the sum of the number of holds in the first result display section holding area Ra and the number of holds in the second result display section holding area Rb. Area CR is provided.

  Further, the reserved ball storage area 232 is provided with an order storage area OR for storing the order in which the game balls are won in the respective operation ports 33 and 34. The order storage area OR is composed of 1 byte, and each bit is associated with eight storage areas from the first area to the eighth area. More specifically, they are associated with the first area, the second area,.

  The execution area AE shown in FIG. 7 is stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when the variable display of each result display section AS, BS is started. This is an area for moving each value. The execution area AE has the same configuration as the storage area for one of the result display area reservation areas Ra and Rb. Furthermore, the execution area AE is provided with an area for storing information of the order storage area OR.

<Various processes executed by main controller 81>
Next, a timer interrupt process and a normal process that are executed when the MPU 202 in the main controller 81 advances the game in each game time will be described. In addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, the MPU 202 executes a main process that is activated when the power is turned on and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). Description of these processes is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. This process is started periodically by the MPU 202 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

  In step S101 in the timer interrupt process, a read process is executed. In the reading process, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 81 is read, and the state of the switch is determined and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

  After executing the reading process in step S101, the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In subsequent step S103, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  After that, in step S104, a winning process for the operating opening accompanying winning of each operating opening 33, 34 is executed. In subsequent step S105, after a through winning process for winning through the through gate 35 is executed, the timer interrupt process is terminated. In the through winning process, if a winning to the through gate 35 has occurred, the number of stored bonus items stored in the electronic role holding area is less than the upper limit number (for example, “4”). As a condition, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 is stored in the electric utility reservation area. In addition, the voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for turning on the second holding lamp unit 46 corresponding to the number of stored item holdings.

  The winning process for the upper working port in step S104 will be described below.

<Winning process for working port>
First, the winning process for the working opening will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S <b> 201, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the upper operating port 33 whether or not the game ball has won a prize (start winning) at the upper operating port 33. If it is determined that the game ball has won the upper working port 33, in step S202, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out three game balls is set. In the subsequent step S203, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is read out, and the starting reserved ball storage number RaN stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra is stored. Set (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting reserved ball memory number RaN). Thereafter, in step S204, an information acquisition process for storing the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the main winning process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper working port 33, in step S205, whether or not the game ball has won the lower working port 34 (starting winning) corresponds to the lower working port 34. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor. If it is determined that the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 97 to pay out four game balls is set in step S206. In the subsequent step S207, the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is read, and the starting reserved ball storage number RbN stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb is determined. Set (hereinafter also referred to as second starting reserved ball memory number RbN). Thereafter, an information acquisition process is performed in step S204, and the main winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if both step S201 and step S205 are NO, that is, if the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 33 and the lower operating port 34, the main winning process is terminated as it is.

  The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S206 is transmitted to the payout control device 97 in step S401 of the external output process of the normal process described later.

  Here, the information acquisition process of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S203 or step S207 described above is less than an upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the reserved memory number N is the upper limit value, the process is terminated. If the reserved memory number N is less than the upper limit value, the start reserved ball memory number N of the corresponding result display area reserved area is incremented by 1 in step S302. At the same time, the value stored in the reserved number storage area CR in step S303 (hereinafter also referred to as the reserved number CRN) is incremented by one.

  In a succeeding step S304, it is determined whether or not the current winning is a winning to the upper working port 33. Specifically, it is determined which of the first start reserved ball memory number RaN and the second start hold ball memory number RbN is set. When the ball storage number RaN is set, it is determined that the winning is to the upper working port 33.

  If it is determined in step S304 that the winning is not to the upper working port 33, that is, if the winning is to the lower working port 34, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, a hold flag is stored in the area of the order storage area OR corresponding to the value of the hold count storage area CR. Specifically, the hold flag is stored in the order storage area OR corresponding to the area corresponding to the value of the hold storage number CRN, and if the game ball has won the lower operating port 34, in step S303 A hold flag is stored in the order storage area OR corresponding to the hold storage number CRN incremented by one. The hold flag is for specifying that the current winning is a winning to the lower operation port 34.

  In the subsequent step S306, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are used as the first storage area among the free storage area areas of the corresponding result display area reservation area. That is, the number is stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number incremented by 1 in step S302.

  In other words, when the first starting reserved ball storage number RaN is set, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 are displayed as the first result display unit. The first storage area among the empty storage areas of the reserved storage area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first starting reserved ball storage number RaN incremented by 1 in step S302.

  When the second starting reserved ball storage number RbN is set, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in the step S103 are displayed in the second result display section. Of the reserved storage area Rb, the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second starting reserved ball storage number RbN incremented by 1 in step S302.

  In the subsequent step S307, a hold command is set. The hold command includes information on which of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 the game ball has won. The hold command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in an external output process (step S401) of a normal process described later. When the voice lamp control device 82 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the upper working port 33, the voice lamp control device 82 executes processing for turning on the first hold lamp unit 45. The first hold lamp unit 45 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the first start hold ball storage number RaN is 1, the first hold lamp unit 45 at the left end is turned on and the first start hold ball If the stored number RaN is 4, all the first holding lamp portions 45 are turned on. Further, when a hold command transmitted based on a winning to the lower working port 34 is received, a process for lighting the second hold lamp unit 46 is executed. The second holding lamp unit 46 is sequentially turned on from the left side. For example, if the second starting holding ball storage number RbN is 1, the leftmost second holding lamp unit 46 is turned on and the second starting holding ball is turned on. If the stored number RbN is 4, all the second holding lamp portions 46 are turned on.

  Further, the voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received hold command to the display control device 212. When receiving the hold command, the display control device 212 changes the display of the hold display area Ga in accordance with the increase in the number of holds.

  When the hold command is set in step S307, the information acquisition process is terminated.

<Normal processing>
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S401 to S408 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S410 and S411 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S401, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 97. If an effect command such as a hold command, a change command, a type command, or a change end command is set, the command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82.

  Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  In the subsequent step S403, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 97 are read. Thereafter, in step S404, a game time control process for controlling a game in each game time is executed. In the game times control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 41, display control of the result display sections AS and BS on the side performing variation display, and the like are performed. Details of the game times control process will be described later.

  Thereafter, in step S405, a first game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, by the first game state transition process, the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, or when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like is set.

  In step S406, a second game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although the details will be described later, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished and the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set by the second game state transition process, the low probability mode or the low frequency support mode is set. Or

  In the subsequent step S407, a confirmation process for the first pending notice is executed, and in a step S408, a confirmation process for the second pending notice is executed. As will be described in detail later, in the confirmation process for each hold notice, the jackpot result is handled when the hold information stored in the open / close execution mode becomes the target of the success / failure determination before being the target of the success / failure determination. It is determined whether or not

  In the normal process, an electric support process for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided in the lower working port 34 is also executed. In this electronic combination support process, it is determined whether or not the electric combination 34a is opened, display control of the combination display 44, and the like are performed. In this case, as already explained, since the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set in the pachinko machine 110, the currently set support mode is grasped, and the electric accessory is based on the grasped result. The drive control of 34a is performed.

  In the subsequent step S409, it is determined whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing (steps S410 and S411). That is, in step S410, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204. In step S411, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 204.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the next normal process execution timing is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the big hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. Similarly, The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

<Game times control processing>
Next, the game times control process of step S404 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the game times control process shown in FIG. 14, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag (opening / closing execution state information) is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area (opening / closing execution state information storage means) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. The opening / closing execution mode flag is stored when the gaming state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is erased when the opening / closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process.

  When in the open / close execution mode, the game is executed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game times starting process in steps S502 to S505 and the game times progressing process in steps S506 to S510. End control processing. In other words, in the open / close execution mode, the game times are not started regardless of whether or not a winning for the operation ports 33 and 34 has occurred.

  If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined in step S502 whether the main display unit 43 is in a variable display. In this determination, it is determined whether or not the variable display flag (variable display information) is stored in the variable display flag storage area (variable display information storage unit) in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The variable display flag is stored when the main display unit 43 starts the variable display, and is deleted when the variable display ends.

  If the main display unit 43 is not in a variable display, the process proceeds to a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505. In the game turn starting process, first, in step S503, it is determined whether or not the reserved storage number CRN is “0”. The case where the reserved storage number CRN is “0” means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 232. Accordingly, the game turn control process is terminated as it is.

  If the reserved storage number CRN is not “0”, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the holding area of the holding ball storage area 232 for variable display is executed in step S504, and further in step S505. The variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 43 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. When the variation start process is executed, the game times control process is terminated.

  Here, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail below.

  First, the data setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, the data in the order storage area OR is shifted. In this data shift process, the data stored in the first to eighth areas is shifted in order to the lower area side. The data in the first area is shifted to the execution area and the second area → the second area. Data in each area is shifted, such as 1 area, 3rd area → 2nd area, 4th area → 3rd area.

  In a succeeding step S602, it is determined whether or not a hold flag is stored in the data of the order storage area OR shifted to the execution area in the step S601. When the hold flag is not stored, the current game round is executed based on the winning to the upper operation port 33, and the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S603 to S607 is executed. . When the hold flag is stored, the current game round is executed based on the winning to the lower operation port 34, and the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S608 to S612 is executed. .

  In the data setting process for the first result display section, first, in step S603, the first start-reserved ball storage number RaN of the first result display section reservation area Ra is decremented by one. In subsequent step S604, the reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one. Thereafter, in step S605, the data stored in the first area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. In step S605, a process for shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first result display area reservation area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In subsequent step S606, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If it is stored, it is erased, and if it is not stored, its state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the start of the current variation display is the first result display unit AS or the second result display unit BS.

  In the subsequent step S607, a shift command (shift occurrence information), which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted is set. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, information indicating that the reserved area to which the data is shifted this time corresponds to the reserved area Ra for the first result display section, that is, the upper operating port 33. A shift time command including information indicating that it is compatible is selected, and the selected shift time command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S607 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the first hold lamp unit 45 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold based on the received shift command. In addition, the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received shift command to the display control device 212. Based on the received shift command, the display control device 212 updates the display of the hold display area Ga in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number.

  In the data setting process for the second result display section, first, in step S608, the second start reserved ball storage number RbN of the second result display section reservation area Rb is decremented by one. In subsequent step S609, the reserved storage number CRN is decremented by one.

  Thereafter, in step S610, the data stored in the first area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. In step S610, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second result display area reservation area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side, clearing the data in the first area, and from the second area to the first area, Data in each area is shifted, such as 3 area → second area, fourth area → third area, and so on.

  In subsequent step S611, the second result display section flag (second result display section information) is stored in the second result display section flag storage area (second result display section information storage means) provided in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. If not stored, the second result display section flag is stored, and if stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S612, a shift command (shift occurrence information) is set, which is information for causing the audio lamp control device 82, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the reserved area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 225 of the ROM 203, it corresponds to the information indicating that the reserved area to which the current data is shifted corresponds to the reserved area Rb for the second result display section, that is, corresponds to the lower operation port 34. The command at the time of shift including the information indicating that the command is being performed is selected, and the selected command at the time of shift is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. Thereafter, the data setting process is terminated.

  The shift command set in step S612 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 executes a process for changing the display on the second holding lamp unit 46 of the variable display unit 36 in accordance with the decrease in the number of holdings based on the received shift command. In addition, the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received shift command to the display control device 212. Based on the received shift command, the display control device 212 updates the display of the hold display area Ga in correspondence with the decrease in the hold number.

  Next, the fluctuation start process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the variation start process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the winning / losing lottery mode is a high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a high probability mode flag (high probability state information) is stored in a high probability mode flag storage area (high probability state information storage means) provided in various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204. To do. The high probability mode flag is stored at the end of the opening / closing execution mode related to the occurrence of the probability variation jackpot result, and is deleted when a predetermined number of games have elapsed without entering the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode is executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value acquired from the one updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot value information corresponding to the low probability mode shown in FIG. To do. On the other hand, if the mode is the high probability mode in step S701, the success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in step S703. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value acquired from the one updated by the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the jackpot value information corresponding to the high probability mode shown in FIG. To do. If the process of step S702 or step S703 is executed, the process proceeds to step S704.

  In step S704, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S702 or step S703 is a big win. In the case of a big win, in steps S705 to S710, a process for setting a game result in the case of a big win and a process for setting a stop result are executed.

  In step S705, distribution determination is performed with reference to the distribution table (FIG. 9). Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the numerical range of the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

After the process of step S705, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the game result distributed in step S705 is a 6R probability variation jackpot result. If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S707. In step S707, 6R jackpot stop result setting processing is executed. In the 6R jackpot stop result setting process, the stop result table corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is referred to the 6R jackpot stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224. The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S708, the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.
On the other hand, if it is not the 6R probability variation jackpot result in step S706, the process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, referring to the stop result table for 16R jackpot in the stop result table storage area 224, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is acquired. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204. Thereafter, in step S710, the 16R jackpot flag is stored in the jackpot flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 235 of the RAM 204.

  If it is not a big win in step S704, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, for the out-of-game time for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS in the current game round that results in a detachment result. Execute the stop result setting process. In the outage stop result setting process, referring to the outage stop result table in the stop result table storage area 224, stop result data corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE The address information is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204.

  If the process of step S708, step S710, or step S711 is executed, the process proceeds to step S712. In step S712, a variable display time setting process is executed. Specifically, the variable display time is set in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204. The value of the variable display time counter area is subtracted every predetermined period, and when the value becomes “0”, the game round is ended.

  In the variation display time setting process, the value of the variation type counter CS is acquired, and the variation display time corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS is selected from the variation display time table stored in the ROM 203. . In the variable display time table, the one corresponding to the jackpot winning and the one corresponding to the losing result are set. Thereby, even if the value of the variation type counter CS is the same, the variation display time can be varied depending on the game result. As a result, it is possible to diversify the pattern of the variable display time that is set.

  After step S712, it is determined in step S713 whether or not the second result display unit flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the second result display section flag is not stored, the first variation command is set in step S714. The first change command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the upper working port 33, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information. On the other hand, if the second result display section flag is stored, a second variation command is set in step S715. The second change command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning to the lower working port 34, and information on whether or not reach has occurred, and Contains variable display time information.

  After executing the process of step S714 or step S715, a type command is set in step S716. The type command includes game result information. That is, the type command includes information on 16R probability variation jackpot results, information on 6R probability variation jackpot results, and the like as game result information.

  The variation command and type command set in steps S714 to S716 are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 determines the light emission mode of the display lamp unit 63 and the sound output mode of the speaker unit 64 based on the received change command and type command, and performs various operations so that the determined contents are executed. Control the equipment. The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received change command and type command to the display control device 212 as they are. The display control device 212 controls the display of the symbol display device 41 so that the symbol variation display corresponding to each game time is performed based on the variation command and the type command.

  After that, in step S717, the display of variation of the picture is started in the result display unit corresponding to the current game time out of the first result display unit AS and the second result display unit BS. In this case, when the second result display unit flag is not stored in the RAM 204, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the first result display unit AS, and the second result display unit flag is set. If stored, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit BS.

  Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 14), when the main display unit 43 is in a variable display, the game times progress process of steps S506 to S510 is executed. In the process for advancing game times, first, in step S506, it is determined whether or not the current game time fluctuation display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable display time information stored in the variable display time counter area of the RAM 204 is “0”. As described above, the value of the variable display time information is set in the variable display time setting process (step S712). The set value of the variable display time information is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started.

  If the variable display time has not elapsed, the variable display process is executed in step S507. In the process for variable display, the display mode in the result display section related to the current game time is changed. Thereafter, the game times control process is terminated.

  If the change display time has elapsed, change end processing is executed in step S508. In the change end process, the address information stored in the RAM 204 in any of the processes of step S707, step S709, or step S711 is specified, and the picture mode corresponding to the address information is the result display section related to the current game round. The result display section is controlled to be displayed at.

  In the subsequent step S509, a change end command is set. The change end command set in step S509 is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect in the game round based on the received variation end command. Further, the change end command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the change end command, thereby confirming and displaying the combination of the final stop symbols in the game round ( Final stop display).

  Thereafter, in step S510, a game number counter subtraction process is executed. Specifically, each of the values of the high probability game number counter area and the high frequency game number counter area provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 is decremented by one. The high probability game number counter area is used to determine whether or not it is time to end the high probability mode when the high probability mode is set. The high frequency game frequency counter area is used to determine whether or not it is the timing to end the high frequency support mode when the high frequency support mode is set. When the game number counter subtraction process is executed, the game number control process is terminated.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the first gaming state transition process of step S405 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  In the first gaming state transition process shown in FIG. 17, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the variation display of the picture in the first result display section AS or the second result display section BS of one game time is finished. When it is not the timing when the variable display is finished, the first gaming state transition process is finished as it is.

  If it is the timing when the variable display is finished, it is determined in step S803 whether or not the game result of the current game time corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 16R jackpot flag or the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If none of the flags is stored, the first game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the above flags is stored, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current opening / closing execution mode is executed in step S804. In the round display start process, first, address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 204 is confirmed. Then, stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 203, and the content of the number of rounds is confirmed from the specified stop result data. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43. As a result, the round display section RS displays information about the round related to the output.

  In a succeeding step S805, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R jackpot result. Specifically, it is determined whether either the 16R jackpot flag or the 6R jackpot flag is stored in the RAM 204. If the 16R jackpot flag is not stored, “6” is set in the round counter area RC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in step S806. The round counter area RC is for counting the number of times that the big prize opening 32a is opened, and for specifying the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode for the opening of the big prize opening 32a this time. is there. On the other hand, if the 16R jackpot flag is stored, “16” is set in the round counter area RC in step S807.

  After executing the process of step S806 or step S807, an opening command is set in step S808. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). This opening command includes information indicating whether the result is a 16R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R probability variation jackpot result. Based on the received opening command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the contents of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode, and controls various devices so that the determined contents of the effect are executed. In addition, the opening command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the opening command, thereby displaying corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode (for example, moving image display). Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed. After executing the process of step S808, the first gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, an affirmative determination is made in step S801, and a big prize opening opening / closing process is executed in step S809. The big prize opening / closing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the special winning opening 32a is being opened. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the driving state of the variable prize driving unit 32c. If the big prize opening 32a is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, and whether the value of the timer area T is “0” in step S903. Determine.

  When the value of the round counter area RC is “0” or when the value of the timer area T is not “0”, the big prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” and the value of the timer area T is “0”, the process proceeds to step S904, and the variable prize driving unit 32c is driven to open the big prize opening 32a. State.

  In the subsequent step S905, setting processing for each round is executed. Specifically, “15000” (that is, 30 sec) is set in the timer area T provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to measure the opening and closing timing for opening and closing the special winning opening 32a. The count value set here is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 10) is started, that is, every 2 msec. In the setting process for each round, “10” is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 234 of the RAM 204 in order to count the number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 32a.

  In a succeeding step S906, a round specifying process is executed. The round specifying process is to specify how many times the current big winning opening 32a is opened, and to specify how many rounds the opening of the current big winning opening 32a is in the opening / closing execution mode. is there. More specifically, the current round counter area RC value and whether a 16R jackpot flag or a six round jackpot flag is stored specify how many rounds this time is.

  Thereafter, in step S907, a release command including information on the number of rounds specified in step S906 is set. The set release command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). In addition, the release command includes information on which one of the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result is included, and the sound lamp control device 82 outputs the received release command to the display control device 212. . By receiving the opening command, the display control device 212 can identify the round number in the opening / closing execution mode and which jackpot result the current opening / closing execution mode is based on. When the process of step S907 is executed, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  In step S901, if the big prize opening is open, the process proceeds to step S908, and it is determined whether or not the value of the timer area T is "0". If the value of the timer area T is not “0”, it is determined in step S909 whether or not a game ball has won the big winning opening 32a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 32. If no winning has occurred, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by 1 in step S910, and then it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S911. If it is not “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If the value of the timer area T is “0” in step S908, or if the value of the winning counter area PC is “0” in step S911, it means that the special winning opening closing condition is established. In such a case, in step S912, the variable winning drive unit 32c is set in a non-driven state to close the special winning opening 32a.

  In the subsequent step S913, the value of the round counter area RC is decremented by 1, and in step S914, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. When the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, the main prize winning opening / closing process is finished as it is.

  If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0” in step S914, the process proceeds to step S915. In step S915, “1000” (that is, 2 sec) is set in the timer area T. Thereafter, a closing command is set in step S916, and the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated. The set closing command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). This close command includes information on whether it is a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result. Based on the received closing command, the sound lamp control device 82 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the high-frequency winning mode, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

  Returning to the description of the first game state transition process (FIG. 17), if the special winning opening / closing process is executed, the process proceeds to step S810. In step S810, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter area RC is “0”. If the value of the round counter area RC is not “0”, the first gaming state transition process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the round counter area RC is “0”, an ending command is set in step S811. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. In addition, the ending command is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 82 to the display control device 212, and the display control device 212 receives the ending command, thereby terminating the display corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode. Thereafter, the display control device 212 starts the display after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In the pachinko machine 10, when the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display corresponding to the state in which the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are set when the open / close execution mode ends.

  Thereafter, in step S812, a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. Here, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1001, flag erasure processing is executed. Specifically, each of the opening / closing execution mode flag, the jackpot flag (6R jackpot flag or 16R jackpot flag), the high probability mode flag, and the high frequency support flag are deleted. Further, in the flag erasing process, the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored in the confirmation process for each holding notice are erased. In this erasing process, a process for clearing the flag storage area in which each flag is stored is executed. If no flag is stored, the state is maintained.

  In the subsequent step S1002, the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, in step S1003, “5” is set in the high probability game number counter area of the various counter areas 234.

  In step S1004, the high frequency support flag is stored in the high frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, in step S1005, “50” is set in the high-frequency game number counter area of the various counter areas 234. When the process of step S1005 is executed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is ended.

  Returning to the description of the first gaming state transition process (FIG. 17), after the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S812 is terminated, a round display termination process is performed in step S813. In this process, the display control of the round display unit RS is terminated so that the round display unit RS in the main display unit 43 is turned off.

  After that, in step S814, after executing the opening / closing execution mode termination processing, the gaming state transition processing is terminated. In the opening / closing execution mode end processing, if the 6R jackpot flag and the 16R jackpot flag are stored, they are deleted, and if not already stored, the state is maintained.

<Second gaming state transition process>
Next, the second game state transition process in step S406 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored in the high probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. If the high probability mode flag is stored, the high probability mode flag is stored. judge. If the high probability mode flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the value of the high probability game count counter area in the various counter areas 234 is “0”. When the value of the high probability game number counter area is not “0”, the second game state transition process is terminated.

  If the value of the high probability game number counter is “0” in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103. In step S1103, the high probability mode flag is deleted. In the subsequent step S1104, the low probability mode flag is stored in the low probability mode flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. Thereafter, a low probability command is set in step S1105, and the second gaming state transition process is terminated. The low probability command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the low probability command to the display control device 212. When receiving a low probability command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display in the low probability mode.

  When the open / close execution mode ends, “5” is set in the high probability game number counter area. Further, the value of the high probability game number counter area is subtracted when one game number is completed in the game number control process. By executing the processing of step S1102 to step S1104, the high probability mode is ended and the low probability mode is set when five game times have elapsed after the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is not the high probability mode in step S1101, the process proceeds to step S1106. In step S1106, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode is set. Specifically, it is determined whether the high frequency support flag is stored in the high frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235, and the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is stored. Is determined. If it is not the high frequency support mode, the second game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it is in the high frequency support mode in step S1106, the process proceeds to step S1107. In step S1107, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-frequency game number counter area in the various counter areas 234 is “0”. If the value of the high-frequency game number counter area is not “0”, the second game state transition process is terminated as it is.

  When the value of the high frequency game number counter area is “0” in step S1107, the process proceeds to step S1108. In step S1108, the high frequency support flag is deleted, and in step S1109, the low frequency support flag is stored in the low frequency support flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. In the subsequent step S1110, a low frequency command is set and the second gaming state transition process is terminated. The low frequency command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the low frequency command to the display control device 212. When receiving a low frequency command, the display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display in the low frequency support mode.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, “50” is set in the high probability game number counter area. Further, the value of the high probability game number counter area is subtracted when one game number is completed in the game number control process. By executing the processing from step S1107 to step S1109, the high frequency support mode is ended and the low frequency support mode is set when 50 game times have elapsed after the open / close execution mode has ended. .

  As described above, the high probability mode ends when five game times have elapsed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. For this reason, when the high frequency support mode ends and the low frequency support mode is set, the lottery mode is already in the low probability mode. For this reason, when the process of step S1108 and step S1109 is performed, a game state will be in a normal state. Moreover, the display control apparatus 212 controls the symbol display apparatus 41 to start the display in a normal state, when a low frequency command is received.

<About reservation notice>
Here, in this pachinko machine 10, the reservation notice suggesting the content of the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display portion and the hold area Rb for the second result display portion of the hold ball storage area 232, It is configured to be performed at a timing before the game times related to the hold information are started, specifically, in the opening / closing execution mode. Such a hold notice is performed by executing predetermined control in the display control device 212 based on a predetermined command transmitted from the main control device 81. The electrical configuration and processing configuration related to the reservation notice will be described below.

<Electrical configuration related to pending notice>
First, the electrical configuration of the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 will be described below with reference to the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 242 is mounted on an audio lamp control board 241 provided in the audio lamp control device 82. The MPU 242 is a ROM 243 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 242 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 243 is executed. A RAM 244, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like are incorporated. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 243 and the RAM 244 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 242, and each may be made into a chip individually. The same applies to MPUs of other control devices.

  The MPU 242 is provided with an input port and an output port. A main controller 81 is connected to the input side of the MPU 242. From the main control device 81, the game time control commands (game time control information) such as the change command, the type command, and the change end command described above are received. Also, a hold display control command (hold display control information) such as a shift command and a hold command to be described later is received.

  As described above, the holding lamp portions 45 and 46 provided in the variable display unit 36 and the display lamp portion 63 and the speaker portion 64 provided in the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 242. In addition, a display control device 212 is connected. In this case, the various commands are transmitted to the display control device 212 while maintaining the information form as it is.

  The display control device 212 includes a display control board 251 on which an MPU 252 that is an element in which a program ROM 253 and a work RAM 254 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 255, a character ROM 256, and a video RAM 257 are mounted. It has. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 253 and the work RAM 254 are made into one chip with respect to the MPU 252, but each may be made into a chip individually.

  The MPU 252 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 81 via the sound lamp control device 82 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 255 (specifically, internal commands for the VDP 255). Generation). In addition, the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the special display device 48 in addition to the control of the VDP 255. Specifically, the MPU 252 controls the special display device 48 to execute the hold notice.

  The program ROM 253 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 252 and fixed value data, and JPEG format image data for a background image is also stored and held. A part of the fixed value data is stored in advance in the lottery table storage area 261 of the program ROM 253. The details of the area 261 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The work RAM 254 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the MPU 252. These work data, flags and the like are stored in the respective areas 262 to 263 of the work RAM 254. The details of these areas 262 to 263 will be described together with the description of the processing executed by the MPU 252.

  The VDP 255 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. Since the VDP 255 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 255 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a dedicated firmware for drawing processing. The VDP 255 adjusts the timings of the MPU 252, the video RAM 257, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and also reads out the image data to be stored in the video RAM 257 from the character ROM 256 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 256 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. The character ROM 256 holds bit map format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bit map image, and the like. In the character ROM 256, a holding image data storage area 269 in which image data to be displayed in the holding display areas Ga and Gb of the symbol display device 41 is set as a part of the data.

  It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 256 and store the image data and the like in a shared manner with each character ROM 256. Further, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the JPEG image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 253 is stored in the character ROM 256.

  The video RAM 257 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display content of the symbol display device 41 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 257. In the video RAM 257, a hold display area 271 corresponding to the hold display area Ga is set.

  In the hold display area 271, the first unit area 272, the second unit area 273, the third unit area 274, the first unit area 272, and the unit hold display areas Ga 1 to Ga 8 in the hold display area Ga have a one-to-one correspondence. A four unit area 275, a fifth unit area 276, a sixth unit area 277, a seventh unit area 278, and an eighth unit area 279 are set. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 corresponding to the hold display area Ga, images corresponding to the data written in the unit areas 272 to 279 are displayed. In the unit hold display areas Ga1 to Ga8 corresponding to the unit areas 272 to 279 for which no data is set, no image is displayed or a background image on the display screen of the symbol display device 41 is displayed.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the main controller 81>
Next, processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 will be described. As a process related to the hold notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81, a confirmation process for the first hold notice and a confirmation process for the second hold notice are set.

<Confirmation process for first hold notice>
First, the confirmation process for the first hold notice in step S407 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the confirmation process for the first hold notice.

  First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored, it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated.

  If it is in the opening / closing execution mode in step S1201, the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, it is determined whether or not the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. The determined flag storage area is an area for storing a determined flag and a first match information flag, which will be described later. The first match information flag is a flag that is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice. When the first coincidence information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

  If the first match information flag is not stored in step S1202, the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, until the execution determination process in the fluctuation start process is executed five times, out of the hold information to be the target of the determination process, the determination process of the determination process in the confirmation process for the advance notice. Identify pending information that is not targeted. More specifically, after the open / close execution mode is completed based on the hold flag stored in the order storage area OR and the presence / absence of hold information in each of the hold areas Ra and Rb, the validity determination process in the change start process is executed five times. Until this is done, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process is specified. Then, with reference to the determined flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice is stored.

  Here, a supplementary description will be given of the method for identifying the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the process of step S1203. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the order in which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process is held regardless of which of the operating openings 33 and 34 is a winning prize. It is the order in which information was acquired. In the process of step S1203, first, the order in which the game balls win the respective operation ports 33 and 34 is specified from the presence or absence of the hold flag in the order storage area OR. From the presence / absence of the hold information in each hold area Ra, Rb and the number of each hold information, any hold information is determined until the current determination process in the change start process is executed five times after the current opening / closing execution mode is completed. Then, it is specified whether or not it is a target of the validity determination process.

  A supplementary explanation will be given for the determined flag storage area. The determined flag storage area stores various flags corresponding to the first area to the fourth area in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the first to fourth areas in the second result display area reservation area Rb. Each area 235 is provided. The determined flag is stored when the stored hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. For example, when the hold information stored in the first area in the second result display section hold area Rb is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice, the determined flag corresponding to the first area is stored. The determined flag is stored in the area. In step S1203, whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice in the hold notice confirmation process is stored by checking whether or not the hold information is stored and whether or not the determined flag is stored. Have confirmed. Note that the stored determined flag is deleted in step S1001 in the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, as described above. In addition, one area in the determined flag storage area is configured by a plurality of bits so that the determined flag and the first match information flag can be stored.

  In subsequent step S1204, as a result of the confirmation processing in step S1203, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice confirmation process is stored. If hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, the determination process in steps S1205 to S1208 is executed. If the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended as it is.

  In step S1205, the big hit determination information among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice in this process, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1 is grasped. . The hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored first among the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice confirmed in step S1203. It will be.

  After that, in step S1206, the determined flag is stored in the area corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the determination process of the hold notice in the hold notice confirmation process. For example, in the case where the hold information that is the target of the determination process of whether or not in the confirmation process for holding notice is stored in the second area, the determined flag is stored in the determined flag storage area corresponding to the second area. The

  In a succeeding step S1207, a success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. In the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the hold notice for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until the success / failure determination process in the change start process is executed five times after the open / close execution mode is completed. This is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process. Here, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. In other words, in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high probability after the open / close execution mode ends so as to target the hold information that is the object of the determination of success / failure in the high probability mode. The variation start process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in the variation start process so as to target the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process until the upper limit number of games for which the mode is set elapses. The number of pending information is the same as the upper limit count. For this reason, in step S1207, the success / failure determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed.

  In a succeeding step S1208, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in the step S1207 corresponds to the big win. If it is not compatible with the big win, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended as it is.

  If it is determined in step S1208 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1209. In step S1209, the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the first coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. Further, by storing the first match information flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1202 in the confirmation process for the first hold notice after this time, and the execution of the processes after step S1203 is restricted. By executing the process of step S1202, it is possible to prevent a plurality of first matching information flags from being stored in one opening / closing execution mode.

  If the process of step S1209 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1210. In step S1210, a first match information command is set. This first coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the first coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The first match information command includes information indicating which hold information matches the jackpot information. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain how many game winning wins are after the opening / closing execution mode is complete | finished. When the first coincidence information command is set in step S1210, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

<Confirmation process for second hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for the second hold notice in step S408 of the normal process (FIG. 13) will be described. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing a confirmation process for second hold notice.

  First, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored in the opening / closing execution mode flag storage area, and when the opening / closing execution mode flag is stored, it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is being performed. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the second reservation notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the open / close execution mode is in progress, the process advances to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not the second match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. The second match information flag is a flag that is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the second hold notice. If the second match information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended as it is.

  If the second match information flag is not stored in step S1302, the process proceeds to step S1303. In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. If the first match information flag is not stored, the confirmation process for the second pending notice is terminated without executing the processes after step S1304. By executing the process of step S1303, it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the second hold notice in the second hold notice confirmation process. It will be executed when it is done.

  If the first match information flag is stored in step S1303, the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, undecided hold among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed five times in view of the hold information corresponding to the storage of the first match information flag. Execute information confirmation processing. Specifically, in the area corresponding to the target of the change start process until the change start process is executed five times from the area where the first match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. An area in which the determined flag is not stored is specified. Then, by grasping the presence or absence of the hold information corresponding to the area, it is grasped whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored.

  In the subsequent step S1305, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is stored as a result of the check process in step S1304. When the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, the determination process in steps S1306 to S1309 is executed. When the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is finished as it is. Note that the processing from step S1306 to step S1309 is the same as step S1205 to step S1208 in the confirmation processing for the first hold notice described above, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  If it is determined in step S1309 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1310. In step S1310, the second match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the second coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. In addition, by storing the second match information flag, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302 in the confirmation process for the second hold notice after this time, and execution of the processes after step S1303 is restricted.

  If the process of step S1310 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, a second match information command is set. This second coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The second match information command includes information indicating which hold information matches the jackpot information. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain how many game winning wins are after the opening / closing execution mode is complete | finished. When the second coincidence information command is set in step S1311, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended.

  In step S1308 in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, a determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed as in step S1207 in the check process for the first hold notice. When the hold information corresponding to the area in which the first coincidence information flag is stored becomes the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process, the opening / closing execution mode is entered. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. Therefore, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, after the opening / closing execution mode that has been shifted based on the hold information corresponding to the area in which the first match information flag is stored has been determined to be true or false is ended. In addition, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the high probability mode is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

<Regarding the processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212>
Next, the processing related to the hold notice executed by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 26 and the explanatory diagram showing how the hold notice of FIG. 27 is executed. In the pachinko machine 10, the special effect is executed as the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode in which the coincidence information command is set by the main control device 81. Specifically, the timing at which the opening / closing execution mode is set again after the opening / closing execution mode ends and the timing at which the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode is executed are associated with each other. Specifically, the round in which the special effect in the opening / closing execution mode is executed is associated with the game times that are again in the opening / closing execution mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. For example, when a special effect is executed in the third round in the opening / closing execution mode, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, a big win is won in the third game round. The player can grasp the timing when the opening / closing execution mode is entered again after the current opening / closing execution mode ends by grasping the timing when the special effect is executed.

<Match information reception process>
First, the coincidence information reception process executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The coincidence information reception process is a process for determining whether or not the first coincidence information command or the second coincidence information command is received, and is executed at a cycle of 2 msec. In the display control device 212, the received command is stored in the command storage area of the work RAM 254 by the command storage process activated when the command is received. The command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store a plurality of commands individually and can be read from the previously stored commands. Even when a plurality of commands are received at the same time, they are stored in the command storage area. Processing corresponding to each command can be executed satisfactorily.

  In step S1401, it is determined whether a first match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the first match information command.

  If the first match information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, the first round information corresponding to the first match information is stored. As described above, the first match information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information. In step S1402, which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information from the first match information command, specifically, which game number of games will be the jackpot winning after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Identify. Then, the first round information indicating which round should be executed in advance from the specified result is stored in the first round information storage area of the work RAM 254. When the process of step S1402 is executed, the match information reception process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the first match information command has not been received, the process advances to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether a second match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the second match information command. If the second match information command has not been received, the match information reception process ends.

  If the second coincidence information command is received in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404. In step S1404, the second round information corresponding to the second match information is stored. As described above, the second match information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information. In step S1404, which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information from the second match information command, specifically, which game number of games will be the jackpot winning after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. The identification is performed in the same manner as in step S1402. Then, the second round information indicating in which round the reservation notice should be executed is stored in the second round information storage area of the work RAM 254 from the specified result. When the process of step S1404 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  Note that the round information stored in step S1402 or step S1404 is deleted when the open / close execution mode ends.

<Round display start processing>
Next, a round display start process executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This round display start process is a process for determining whether or not to execute a special effect as a hold notice when the special winning opening 32a is opened in the open / close execution mode, and when the matching information reception process is completed. Executed.

  In step S1501, it is determined whether an open command is received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is an open command. If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated.

  If the release command is received in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, a round information grasping process is executed. In the round information grasping process, it is grasped whether each of the first round information and the second round information is memorized, and when any one of the round information is memorized, how many rounds the special effect is executed. Know if they are eyes.

  In the subsequent step S1503, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the first round information. Specifically, as described above, the opening command includes information on how many rounds the opening / closing execution mode is. In step S1503, the round information grasped in step S1502 is compared with the information indicating the round number included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison result is the same.

  If the first round information is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1503. More specifically, in the opening command, the value of “1” to “6” in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is indicated in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. Values “1” to “16” are included, respectively. On the other hand, when the first round information is not stored (that is, when the coincidence information command is not received), the value of the first round information storage area is “0”. For this reason, the comparison result of step S1503 does not match.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the current round corresponds to the first round information, the process advances to step S1504. In step S1504, a special effect corresponding to the first round information is set. By executing the process of step S1504, a special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1504 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1503 that the current round does not correspond to the first round information, the process advances to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode is an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability big hit result. If it is not the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, that is, if the current opening / closing execution mode is one corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, whether or not the information corresponding to the second matching information is “6” or more, that is, the maximum number of hold information that can be stored from 6 game times to 6 games after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. In the 8th game corresponding to each, it is determined whether or not a big hit is won. If the information corresponding to the second matching information is “6” or more, the process proceeds to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the current round is the sixth round. Specifically, it is determined whether information corresponding to the sixth round is included in the received release command. If information corresponding to the sixth round is included, the process proceeds to step S1508. In step S1508, a pending notice execution lottery process is executed. In the pending notice execution lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute a special effect in the current round. Specifically, when a value is acquired from a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254, and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the holding notice execution lottery Judged to win.

  In a succeeding step S1509, it is determined whether or not the result of the pending notice execution lottery is winning. When the holding notice execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S1510. In step S1510, a special effect corresponding to the second round information is set. By executing the process of step S1510, a special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1510 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is not compatible with the sixth round in step S1507, or if the pending notice execution lottery is not won in step S1509, the process proceeds to step S1511. In step S1511, a normal effect is set. Thereby, a normal effect different from the special effect is executed in the current round. When the process of step S1511 is executed, the round display start process is terminated.

  If it is the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result in step S1505, or if the information corresponding to the second match information is smaller than “6” in step S1506, the process proceeds to step S1512.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the second round information. Specifically, the round information grasped in step S1502 is compared with the information on the round number included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison result is the same.

  If the current round is a round corresponding to the second round information in step S1512, the processes of steps S1513 to S1515 are executed. Since the processing from step S1513 to step S1515 is the same as the processing from step S1508 to step S1510, description thereof will be omitted. If it is determined in step S1512 that the current round is not a round corresponding to the second round information, the process proceeds to step S1516. In step S1516, a normal effect is set. When the normal effect is set, the round display start process is terminated.

  In this round display start process, the timing at which the special effect corresponding to the first round information is executed is the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode and the number of games that will be a big win after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Are associated on a one-to-one basis. Here, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is performed on the hold information that is the target of the determination process until the success / failure determination process in the change start process is executed five times. In addition, the maximum number of rounds corresponding to the first round information is five. Therefore, in any of the opening / closing execution modes corresponding to the jackpot result of either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, there is a round associated with the first round information in a one-to-one manner. As a result, even if the number of rounds in the current opening / closing execution mode and the number of games resulting in the jackpot result after the current opening / closing execution mode are ended in a one-to-one correspondence, no problem occurs.

  In addition, when the information corresponding to the second matching information is smaller than 6 or in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the timing at which the special effect corresponding to the second round information is executed is the current opening / closing There is a one-to-one correspondence between the number of rounds in the execution mode and the number of games that will be a big hit after the current opening / closing execution mode ends. When the information corresponding to the second match information is smaller than 6, there is a round associated with the second match information on a one-to-one basis regardless of the jackpot result. In addition, since there are up to 16 rounds of opening / closing execution modes corresponding to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, there are rounds associated with the second match information on a one-to-one basis regardless of the value of the second match information. Become. As a result, there is no problem if the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode and the number of games resulting in the jackpot result after the current open / close execution mode are terminated one-to-one.

  On the other hand, when the information corresponding to the second matching information is 6 or more and the switching execution mode is corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the processing from step S1505 to step S1511 is executed, so that the second round information is supported. The timing at which the special effect is executed corresponds to a plurality of game times for one round. In the determination process of whether or not the confirmation process for the second hold notice is made, the target hold information differs depending on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice. Depending on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice, after the current opening / closing execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the variation start process is the jackpot result at the seventh game time or the eighth game time. May be identified as corresponding to. Here, the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result ends when the sixth round ends. For this reason, if the number of games and the number of rounds that result in the jackpot after the current opening / closing execution mode is associated with each other on a one-to-one basis, it becomes the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process at the seventh game time or the eighth game time. If the hold information corresponds to the jackpot result, the special effect cannot be executed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and when the information corresponding to the second matching information is 6 or more, the special effect is executed in the sixth round. . This is a device for increasing the frequency at which special effects are executed when a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result) having a smaller number of rounds than the maximum number (8) of hold information that can be stored is set. .

  In the pachinko machine 10, in the round corresponding to the first round information, the special effect is executed as the hold notice without executing the hold notice execution lottery process. On the other hand, in the round corresponding to the second round information, the special effect is not executed unless the holding notice execution lottery is won. That is, the frequency at which the special effect corresponding to the first round information is executed is higher than the frequency at which the special effect corresponding to the second round information is executed. In the round corresponding to the first round information, the special performance is always executed, thereby preventing the frequency of the special performance from being excessively low. Also, in the round corresponding to the second round information, a case where a special effect is executed and a case where the special effect is not executed occur, and even if the special effect is not executed, the player can have a sense of expectation for the big win. it can.

  It should be noted that a hold notice execution lottery process for determining whether or not to make a hold notice in a round corresponding to the first round information may be executed. However, the probability of winning in the hold notice execution lottery process is made equal to the probability of winning in the hold notice execution lottery process whether or not to execute the hold notice in the round corresponding to the second round information. Alternatively, it may be higher than the probability.

<Display processing during round for special effects>
The special effect round display processing executed by the display control device 212 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that in describing this processing, an explanatory diagram showing a state in the case where the holding notice in FIG. 27 is executed is appropriately referred to.

  In the special effect round display process, when the round display is being executed, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so as to execute the special effect. This special effect round display process is executed when the above-described round display start process ends.

  In step S1601, it is determined whether or not a round is being displayed. Specifically, it is determined whether one of special effects and normal effects is set in the round display start process. If no effect is set, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  If any effect is set in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether the set effect is a special effect. If the special effect is not set, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  When the effect set in step S1602 is a special effect, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, it is determined whether it is a light emission effect execution timing. Specifically, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with an elapsed counter area for measuring a period that has elapsed since the start of the round display. Then, after the effect is set in the round display start process, the value of the elapsed counter area is updated every time the special effect round display process is executed. When the value of the elapsed counter area becomes a predetermined value, it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached. Specifically, the value of the elapsed counter area is incremented by 1 each time the special effect round display process is executed, and when the value of the elapsed counter area becomes “1000”, that is, the special effect. When about 2 seconds elapse after the setting of is set, it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached.

  If it is determined that the light emission effect execution timing is reached, the process advances to step S1604. In step S1604, special light emission processing is executed. In the special light emission process, the special display device 48 is controlled to turn on the lamp. When the special light emission process is executed, the state in which the lamp in the special display device 48 shown in FIG. 27A is turned off is switched to the state in which the lamp in the special display device 48 shown in FIG. 27B is turned on. It becomes. When the special light emission process is executed, the display process during the special effect round is ended. The light emission mode in the special display device 48 is the same regardless of whether a special effect corresponding to the first round information or a special effect corresponding to the second round information is set.

  If it is not the light emission effect execution timing in step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1605. In step S1605, it is determined whether it is a special display execution timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the progress counter area is “1250”, and when it is “1250”, it is determined that it is the special display execution timing. That is, it is determined that it is the special display execution timing when about 2.5 seconds elapse after the special effect is set. If it is not the special display execution timing in step S1605, the display process during the special effect round is terminated.

  If it is the special display execution timing in step S1605, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, special display processing is executed. In the special display process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that special display is performed in the unit hold display area corresponding to the hold information of the jackpot information. Specifically, for example, when the current round number is the second round, as shown in FIG. 27C, the second unit hold display area Ga2 is displayed with “●” (specifically, winning in the upper working port 33). As shown in FIG. 27 (d), red “●” is displayed based on “,” and blue “●” is displayed based on winning in the lower working port 34. In the second unit hold display area Ga2, as shown in FIG. “○” is displayed. That is, the display mode in the hold display area corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is switched. When the special display process is executed, the display process during the special effect round is ended. Although not described in detail, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the same display as when the normal process is executed is executed when the special light emission process and the special display process are not executed. For this reason, the player can grasp that the current round is a special effect by executing the special light emission process or the special display process.

  By executing the special effect as the hold notice, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is stored. In addition, by grasping the round in which the special light emission process is executed, the player can grasp which game number of times the player wins the big win. Furthermore, by switching the display mode corresponding to the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information.

  Here, the special light emission process and the special display process are respectively executed after about 2 seconds and 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the round display was set. As described above, when the grand prize opening 32a is opened, when 30 seconds elapses, or when 10 game balls are won in the big prize opening 32a, the big prize opening 32a is closed and one round is completed. To do. That is, the timing at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed is included in 30 seconds from when the special winning opening 32a is opened until it is closed. Further, as described above, the game ball is launched at a period of 0.6 sec. Thus, in order to win ten game balls in the big prize opening 32a, it is considered that it takes about 6 seconds even if all the game balls flowing down the game area win the big prize opening 32a. That is, the special light emission process and the special display process are executed before the ten game balls are won after the special winning opening 32a is opened. As described above, the special prize opening 32a is closed without executing the special light emission process and the special display process after the special prize opening 32a is opened, despite the round in which the special effect is set. Can be prevented.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed is shifted. Specifically, the special display process is executed after the special light emission process is executed. By executing the special light emission process, it is possible to notify the player that the special effect is executed, and it is possible to obtain an effect of causing the player to pay attention to the special effect. Further, when the special display process is executed, the symbol display device 41 displays which is the hold information specifically corresponding to the jackpot result. By executing the special display process after the special light emission process is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the special effect executed by the symbol display device 41 when the special display process is executed. Here, when the special light emission process and the special display process are executed at the same time, the player's attention degree is distributed to each of the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41, and the player determines the timing when the special effect is executed. There may be inconveniences that the player cannot grasp or that the player misses the display of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result on the symbol display device 41. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent the above-described inconvenience from occurring due to a difference in timing at which the special light emission process and the special display process are executed.

  Further, in the special display process, which of the holding information specifically corresponds to the jackpot result is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is conceivable that some players cannot understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot result only at the timing when the special performance is executed. In this regard, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand which hold information corresponds to the jackpot result from the display mode on the symbol display device 41.

<State when special performance is performed>
A state where the special effect is executed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  First, a description will be given with reference to FIG. At the timing of ta1, the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning game ends, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result. In the current open / close execution mode, among the already stored hold information, after the current open / close execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is a big hit at the second game round and the fifth game round. It corresponds to the winning.

  At the timing of ta2, which is the second round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special effect (hereinafter also referred to as a predecessor special effect) corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed at the second game time The Then, at the timing of ta3, which is the fifth round in the current opening / closing execution mode, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process at the fifth game round (hereinafter also referred to as a rear special effect) ) Is executed. The current opening / closing execution mode is terminated at the subsequent timing ta4.

  Then, at the time ta5, the game times corresponding to the outage result are completed. Thereafter, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed at the timing of ta6, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter also referred to as the rear opening / closing execution mode) corresponding to the special effect on the front side.

  Thereafter, the special effect is executed at the timing ta7 that is the third round in the opening / closing execution mode. This special effect has the same hold information as the special effect on the rear side in the opening / closing execution mode on the front side. Game times are executed from the front opening / closing execution mode to the rear opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, even when the rear side special effect is executed in the front side opening / closing execution mode, the number of games after which the opening / closing execution mode is entered in the rear opening / closing execution mode However, the front opening / closing execution mode and the rear opening / closing execution mode are different. Even if the rear special effect is executed in the front opening / closing execution mode, by executing again the special effect based on the hold information corresponding to the rear special effect in the rear opening / closing execution mode, It is easy for the player to grasp which hold information corresponds to the big win.

  The rear opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing ta8. Then, the game times corresponding to the result of losing are completed twice at the timing of ta9. Thereafter, when the game round corresponding to the big win is completed at the timing of ta10, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode. This opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the execution of the rear special effect in the above-mentioned opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, description will be made with reference to FIG. At the timing of tb1, the game round corresponding to the jackpot winning is completed, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 16R probability variable jackpot result. In the current open / close execution mode, among the already stored hold information, after the current open / close execution mode ends, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the second game and the seventh game corresponds to the big win. ing.

  At the timing of tb2, which is the second round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed at the second game round. After that, at the timing of tb3, a special effect corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process is executed at the seventh game time. Thereafter, the current opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of tb4. After the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of tb5, the operation mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode again at the timing when two game times have passed.

  Here, when the special effect is not executed in the first to fifth rounds, the special effect is not executed in the subsequent rounds. In other words, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the big win is not won by the fifth game, the special effect is not executed even if the big win is won by the sixth to eighth game. In the present embodiment, when the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination processing in the variation start processing is included in the first to fifth game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, In the execution mode, the number of hold information that is a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice increases.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A reservation notice is executed based on information stored in the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb. As a result, for a player, when a plurality of pieces of information are stored in each holding area, the result when the order that is the target of the success / failure determination process becomes the target of the success / failure determination process for the later information is retained. A game of confirming or predicting according to the content of the game is added, and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  The timing at which the hold notice is executed differs depending on the hold information that is the target of the determination of success or failure in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Thus, by grasping the timing when the hold notice is executed, the player can grasp which hold information corresponds to the jackpot result. As a result, when the hold notice is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which hold information the hold notice corresponds to.

  Here, there may be a case in which a holding notice is executed at a timing when a game ball is won in one of the operation ports 33 or 34, or a case in which a holding notice is executed at a timing when a variable display is started. In these cases, the timing at which the hold notice can be executed is short, and the period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the hold notice is executed becomes short. For this reason, a player's attention degree to a game cannot fully be raised. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the period during which the hold notice is executed becomes longer by changing the timing at which the hold notice is executed depending on which holding information is supported. Thereby, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player is expected to execute the hold notice. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player pays attention to the game. Therefore, it becomes possible to increase the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  The number of rounds in the open / close execution mode is associated with the order in which the hold information is subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. Thereby, the player can understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot result by grasping the number of rounds in which the holding notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the sixth round in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variable jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, a holding notice is executed when the big win is won in the sixth to eighth game rounds. In this way, by executing a hold notice by associating one round with a plurality of game times, even if the set number of rounds is less than the number of hold information that can be stored, it is held well. A notice can be executed.

  Furthermore, in the 1st to 5th rounds, the game times associated with each round are made common even in the open / close execution mode corresponding to either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result. This eliminates the need for the player to specify the type of jackpot result when the hold notice is executed in rounds 1 to 5.

  In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the success / failure determination process by the change start process is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the variable display is started and the timing at which the hold notice is executed from occurring almost simultaneously. As a result, when the hold notice is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the number of pieces of hold information stored. Because, when the hold notice is executed and the start of the variable display occurs almost simultaneously, the variable notice is started and the hold notice is executed after the hold information is reduced, or the variable display is executed after the hold notice is executed. This is because the player cannot understand whether the game has started.

  In the opening / closing execution mode, the player only checks whether or not a game ball will win the big winning opening 32a, and the game tends to be monotonous. By executing the hold notice in the opening / closing execution mode, the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode can be increased.

  The hold information associated when the hold notice is executed is different for each round in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, the player can grasp which hold information corresponds to the hold notice by grasping the round when the hold notice is executed. Further, the rounds are divided by the closed state of the special winning opening 32a, and it is possible to prevent the player from being able to grasp which round is the current round. As described above, the player pays attention to the timing at which the hold notice is executed, and the player's degree of attention to the game can be further increased.

  The light emission mode of the special display device 48 is made to be a common mode regardless of the hold information. Thereby, when a program for controlling the special display device 48 is set, the amount of information related to the program can be reduced. Furthermore, since the player can be instructed to which hold information the hold notice is being executed at the timing when the hold notice is executed, even if the light emission pattern is set in a common manner, It is possible to prevent the player from becoming unable to understand whether the hold information is reserved for the hold information.

  In addition, when it is determined in the confirmation process for the first hold notice that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, the determination process of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice is executed. . As a result, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the check process for the hold notice Can be increased. As a result, it is possible to diversify the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. Therefore, the player pays attention to or predicts whether or not the hold determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice is executed for any hold information, so that the player's attention to the game can be increased. it can. In addition, by executing the hold notice corresponding to the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the player can grasp that the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the determination processing in the confirmation process for the hold notice has increased.

  The success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for each hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent execution of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process and the success / failure determination process in the holding notice confirmation process in one normal process. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing time of one normal processing from becoming extremely long. Further, the success / failure determination process in each hold notice confirmation process is executed for one piece of hold information when one hold notice confirmation process is executed. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the number of processing times of the confirmation processing for one hold notice from being prolonged compared to the configuration in which the success / failure judgment process is executed for a plurality of pieces of hold information in the confirmation process for one hold notice. . As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of preventing the processing time of one normal processing from becoming extremely long.

  The confirmation process for each hold notice is executed on the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the change start process in the state in which the high probability mode is set after the open / close execution mode ends. In the high probability mode, the expectation of winning a big hit is higher than in the low probability mode. Thereby, the frequency with which a hold notice is performed can be increased. In addition, the lottery mode when the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process when the confirmation process for the advance notice is the target of the determination process of the variation start process is the high probability mode or the low It is not necessary to determine whether the mode is the probability mode. As a result, it is possible to reduce the processing load required when the confirmation process for each holding notice is executed.

  Further, in the confirmation process for second hold notice, the success / failure determination process in the change start process is 5 in view of the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the first hold notice confirmation process. It is executed for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process until it is executed twice. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode based on the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the change start process is performed in the state in which the high probability mode is set. The hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process can be the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice. In other words, by executing the confirmation process for the second hold notice based on the result of the confirmation process for the first hold notice, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, it becomes a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. There is an effect that the hold information can be easily specified by the confirmation process for the second hold notice.

  When it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the first match information flag is stored, the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the hold information In this case, the determination process of the first hold notice confirmation process is not performed on the hold information to be subjected to the check. Thus, in the determination process for the second hold notice confirmation process, if the area where the first match information flag is stored is grasped, the determination process for the first hold notice confirmation process determines whether the hold information is stored. It becomes possible to grasp whether it was executed. As a result, it is possible to simplify the process for determining which hold information is the target of the determination of the success / failure in the confirmation process for the second hold notice.

  From the first to fifth rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, one hold information is associated with one round. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set until five game times have passed. Regarding the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process during the period in which the high probability mode is set, the player wants to know in detail which hold information corresponds to the big win. In this regard, in the present embodiment, one hold information is associated with one round until the first to fifth rounds. Thereby, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, it becomes possible to make the player know in detail which holding information corresponds to the big hit winning, and information that the player wants to know can be well notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the game.

<Second Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the preset jackpot result is different from that of the first embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result, a 6R normal jackpot result (also referred to as a normal jackpot result) is set. When the 6R normal jackpot result is reached, the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode after the open / close execution mode ends, and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode until the predetermined number of games (50 times) elapses. The When the 6R probability variation jackpot result and the 16R probability variation jackpot result are obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode. In the present embodiment, when either the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result is reached, the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained until the jackpot result is obtained again.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the main symbol to which the odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is assigned corresponds to “specific symbol”, and a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result occurs. The same specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. The main symbols with even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to “non-specific symbols”. When a 6R normal jackpot result occurs, the combination of the same non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. Is done.

  Here, the distribution table in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and “10 to 26” corresponds to the 6R probability variable jackpot result. "27-29" corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, after the type of jackpot result is specified with reference to the distribution table, a stop result setting process corresponding to each jackpot result is executed. Further, as a jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot result, when the 6R normal jackpot result is a 6R normal jackpot flag, when it is a 6R probability variable jackpot result, the 6R probability variable jackpot flag is a 16R probability jackpot result. Each stores a 16R probability variation jackpot flag. Each jackpot flag is deleted when the end process of the opening / closing execution mode in the first gaming state transition process is executed.

<Transition processing at the end of the open / close execution mode>
The transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S1701, it is determined whether a probability variation jackpot flag is stored. Specifically, it is determined whether either a 6R probability variation jackpot flag or a 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored. If any probability variation jackpot flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1702. In step S1702, the flag erasing process described in the first embodiment is executed. Thereafter, in step S1703 and step S1704, the high probability mode flag and the high frequency support mode flag are stored, respectively. In the subsequent step S1705, a high probability command is set. The high probability command includes information indicating that the high probability mode is set. The high probability command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The voice lamp control device 82 transmits the received high probability command to the display control device 212. The display control device 212 controls the symbol display device 41 to start display corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode based on the reception of the high probability command. When the high probability command is set, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is terminated.

  If the probability variation jackpot flag is not stored in step S1701, that is, if the normal jackpot flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1706. In step S1706, the above-described flag erasing process is executed. After that, the high frequency support flag is stored in step S1707, “50” is set in the high frequency game frequency counter area in step S1708, and the transition process at the end of the main opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  Here, in this embodiment, when it is determined in step S1101 in the second gaming state transition process that the high probability mode is set, the second gaming state transition process is performed without executing the processes in steps S1102 to S1105. finish. For this reason, when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R-probability jackpot result or the 16R-probability jackpot result ends, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are maintained until the jackpot is won again.

<Confirmation process for first hold notice>
The confirmation process for the first reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. In the confirmation process for the first hold notice, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored, the jackpot winning is determined by the probability change jackpot result (6R probability change jackpot result and 16R probability change jackpot result) or Which of the normal jackpot results (6R normal jackpot results) is specified is specified. The high probability coincidence information flag is stored when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the probability change jackpot result is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice. The low probability coincidence information flag is stored when it is specified in the confirmation process for the first hold notice that the hold information corresponding to the normal jackpot result is stored.

  If either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in step S1801, the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information has already been stored in the confirmation processing for the first hold notice so far. As a result, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated. On the other hand, if neither the high probability coincidence information flag nor the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S1801, the processes after step S1802 are executed.

  Steps S1802 to S1805 of the confirmation process for the first hold notice in the present embodiment are the same as steps S1203 to S1206 of the check process for the first hold notice in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted. To do.

  If the process of step S1805 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1806. In step S1806, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored, and when the high probability mode flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode.

  In step S1806, if the current gaming state is in the opening / closing execution mode, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is set when the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, when either the 6R probability variation jackpot flag or the 16R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, the high probability mode is determined.

  If it is determined in step S1806 that the mode is the high probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in 1806 that the mode is not the high probability mode, that is, if it is determined that the mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S1808. In step S1808, a determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  If the success / failure determination process is executed in step S1807 or step S1808, the process proceeds to step S1809. In step S1809, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S1807 or step S1808 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the first pending notice is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1809 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S1810. In step S1810, the information for determining the jackpot type, that is, the information acquired from the information updated by the jackpot type counter C2 among the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice this time is grasped. .

  In subsequent step S1811, it is determined whether or not the grasped information corresponds to a probability variation jackpot result, that is, a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 16R probability variation jackpot result. Specifically, when the grasped information is included in the range of “10 to 29”, it is determined that it corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result.

  If the jackpot result corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result in step S1811, the process proceeds to step S1812. In step S1812, the high probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the high probability coincidence information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the current hold notice is overwritten. In a succeeding step S1813, a high probability coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The coincidence information command includes information corresponding to the fact that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. If the coincidence information command is set in step S1813, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1811 that the probability variation jackpot result is not supported, that is, if the 6R normal jackpot result is supported, the process proceeds to step S1814. In step S1814, the low probability match information flag is stored in the determined flag storage area. Specifically, the low-probability match information flag is stored so as to overwrite the area in which the determined flag that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the current confirmation process for holding notice is overwritten. In a succeeding step S1815, a low probability coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. The coincidence information command includes information corresponding to the fact that the hold information corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is stored. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to 6R normal jackpot result is memorize | stored. When the coincidence information command is set in step S1815, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended. It should be noted that the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored after the confirmation process for holding notice is deleted when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

<Confirmation process for second hold notice>
Next, the confirmation process for second reservation notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that step S1901, step S1905 and step S1906 of the confirmation process for the second reservation notice in the present embodiment are steps S1302, S1306 and step S2 of the confirmation process for the second notice of reservation in the first embodiment. Since it is the same as S1307, the description is omitted.

  If the second match information flag is not stored in step S1901, the process proceeds to step S1902. In step S1902, it is determined whether either a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. If no match information flag is stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is terminated.

  If either the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S1902, the processes after step S1903 are executed. In step S1903, a process for confirming pending information that has not been determined as viewed from the area where the low probability or high probability match information flag is stored is executed. Specifically, judging from the area where the low probability or high probability coincidence information flag is stored in the judged flag storage area, the judgment is performed in the area corresponding to the hold information which is the target of the success / failure judgment processing in the variation start processing thereafter. The area where the completed flag is not stored is specified. Then, by checking the presence / absence of the hold information corresponding to the area and the presence / absence of the determined flag, whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is stored. To figure out.

  In subsequent step S1904, it is determined whether or not pending determination information is stored as a result of the confirmation processing in step S1903. If the undetermined hold information is not stored, the confirmation process for the second hold notice is ended.

  If undetermined hold information is stored, the processing of step S1905 and step S1906 is executed. If the determined flag is stored in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, it is determined whether or not the match information flag stored in the first hold notice confirmation process is a high probability match information flag. If the high probability match information flag is stored, the process advances to step S1908. In step S1908, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if the match information flag stored in step S1907 is not a high probability match information flag, that is, if a low probability match information flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, the determination processing for the success / failure corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  If the process of step S1908 or step S1909 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1910. In step S1910, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S1908 or step S1909 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the second reservation notice is terminated.

  When it corresponds to the big win in step S1910, the process of step S1911 and step S1912 is performed. The processing in step S1911 and step S1912 is the same as that in step S1310 and step S1311 in the confirmation processing for second hold notice in the first embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the present embodiment, either the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, so that the hold information corresponding to the storage of the match information flag changes. When it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the start process, it can be grasped whether the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result is obtained. As a result, it is possible to execute the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second reservation notice in the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the jackpot result.

<Match information reception process>
The coincidence information reception process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether a high probability match information command is received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is a high probability match information command. If a high probability match information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, the high probability coincidence information flag is stored in the high probability coincidence information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The high probability coincidence information flag is for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is stored. When the process of step S2002 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2001 that a high probability match information command has not been received, the process advances to step S2003. In step S2003, it is determined whether a low probability match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is a low probability match information command. If the low probability coincidence information command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2004.

  In step S2004, the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in the low probability coincidence information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The low probability coincidence information flag is for specifying that the hold information corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result is stored. When the process of step S2004 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a low probability match information command has not been received in step S2003, it is determined in step S2005 whether a second match information command has been received. Specifically, it is determined whether the command stored in the command storage area and the current read target command is the second match information command. If the second match information command has not been received, the match information reception process ends.

  When the second coincidence information command is received in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, the second match information flag is stored in a second match information flag storage area provided in the work RAM 254. The second coincidence information flag corresponds to the jackpot winning for the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode based on the storage of the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is completed. It is for specifying that the thing is memorized. When the process of step S2006 is executed, the match information receiving process is terminated.

<Special production performed as a hold notice>
Prior to explaining the control related to the display control device 212, a special effect as a hold notice executed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as a special effect, the special light emission process described in the first embodiment is executed during game play. In addition, a first special effect and a second special effect are set as the special effects. The notification form by the special display device 48 when the special light emission process is executed is different between the first special effect and the second special effect.

  Specifically, when each special effect is executed, the lamp in the special display device 48 blinks. And when the special light emission process in a 1st special effect is performed, the blink period of the lamp in the special display apparatus 48 is shorter than the case where the special light emission process in a 2nd special effect is performed. By grasping the blinking cycle, the player can grasp which of the first special effects and the second special effects is being executed. A program for determining the blinking cycle is stored in the program ROM 253, and the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 controls the special display device 48 with reference to the program.

  Further, when the special light emission process is executed, a sound effect is output from the speaker of the special display device 48. The sound effect program is stored in the program ROM 253 of the MPU 252. Specifically, a first sound effect program for outputting the first sound effect and a second sound effect program for outputting the second sound effect are stored as the sound effect program. When the special light emission process in the first special effect is executed, the second sound effect is output after the output of the first sound effect is repeated a plurality of times. When the special light emission process in the second special effect is executed, the second sound effect is output after the first sound effect is output. That is, when the special light emission process in the first special effect is executed, the number of times the first sound effect is output is larger than when the special light emission process in the second special effect is executed. It is easy for the player to understand which of the first special effect and the second special effect is being executed depending on the number of times the first sound effect is output.

  As described above, the player executes any special effect by making the light emission mode of the lamp and the output mode of the speaker different from each other in the first special effect and the second special effect. It is easy to grasp what is being done.

  Moreover, when changing the output mode of a speaker, it was set as the structure which changes the frequency | count that a 1st sound effect is repeated. Thereby, MPU252 only needs to change the frequency | count of repeating a 1st sound effect program by a 1st special effect and a 2nd special effect, and can reduce the information content for making the output mode of a speaker differ. .

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process executed by the display control device 212 will be described below. In the variation display control process, when the variation command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received via the voice lamp control device 82, the symbol display device 41 executes a variation display of the symbol. To do.

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34, it is determined in step S2101 whether or not one game is being executed. If one game time is not being executed, it is determined in step S2102 whether a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2103.

  On the other hand, when the change display of the symbols for one game is performed, whether or not the change end command transmitted from the main control device 81 is received via the sound lamp control device 82 in step S2104. Determine whether. If the variation end command has not been received, the variation display control processing is terminated after executing the variation processing in step S2105. In the changing process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled so that the symbols are displayed in a variable manner after the game is started.

  If the change end command has been received, the change display control process is terminated after the change end process is executed in step S2106. In the variation end process, the symbol display device 41 is controlled to terminate the symbol variation display and stop the final stop symbol corresponding to the lottery result of the main control device 81.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process executed in step S2103 of the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, the variation command received this time is read out, and information on game results such as information on probability variation jackpot results, information on normal jackpot results, or information on missed results, and information on variation display time are obtained from the commands. In step S2201, from the above identified information, information on the presence / absence of jackpot winning, information on the type of jackpot in the case of winning the jackpot, information on the presence / absence of reach in the case of not winning the jackpot, and the variable display time Is stored in the register of the MPU 252.

  In the subsequent step S2202, it is determined whether or not a big win is won in the current game round from the information stored in the register in step S2201. If it is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, a deviation variation mode setting process is executed. When the deviation variation mode setting processing is executed, the variation start processing is terminated.

  The deviation variation mode setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the deviation variation mode setting process, when the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored, it is determined whether or not to execute the special effect as the hold notice.

  In step S2301, it is determined whether a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. If any match information flag is stored, after the current game round, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination processing in the variation start processing includes that corresponding to the big win Become.

  If either the high probability coincidence information flag or the low probability coincidence information flag is stored in step S2301, the process proceeds to step S2302. In step S2302, a pending notice execution lottery process is executed. In the pending notice execution lottery process, a lottery is performed as to whether or not a special effect is to be executed in the current game round. Specifically, when a value is acquired from a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254, and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the holding notice execution lottery Judged to win.

  In step S2303, it is determined whether the result of the pending notice execution lottery in step S2302 is winning. When the holding notice execution lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2304. In step S2304, it is determined whether a high probability match information flag is stored. If the high probability match information flag is stored, the process advances to step S2305.

  In step S2305, a first effect execution lottery process is executed. In the first effect execution lottery process, whether or not to execute the first special effect is determined. Specifically, when a value is acquired from the random number counter for the first effect execution lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254 and the acquired value corresponds to the execution of the first special effect. It is determined that one production execution lottery is won. Note that a random number counter for holding advance notice execution lottery can be used instead of the random number counter for first effect execution lottery. In this case, the capacity of the random number counter preset in the lottery counter area 262 can be reduced.

  When the first effect execution lottery process is executed, the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the first special effect lottery is won.

  If the first special effect lottery is won, the process proceeds to step S2307. In step S2307, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the disconnection result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the disconnection stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the symbol corresponding to the detachment result (the combination of symbols in which the same symbol combination does not stop on the same line) is finally stopped. Thereafter, in step S2308, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the first special effect is executed, and the outlier fluctuation mode setting process is terminated. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the first special effect, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2307 is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the special display device 48 is set so that the first special effect is executed at any timing from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display.

  When the high probability match information flag is not stored in step S2304 (when the low probability match information flag is stored), or when it is determined that the first special effect execution lottery is not won in step S2306, The process proceeds to step S2309.

  In step S2309, similarly to step S2307, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the detachment is executed. Thereafter, in step S2310, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the second special effect is executed, and the outlier fluctuation mode setting process is terminated. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the execution of the second special effect, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2309 is stopped and displayed. The display mode of the special display device 48 is set so that the second special effect is executed at any timing from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display.

  On the other hand, if the coincidence information flag (high probability coincidence information flag, low probability coincidence information flag) is not stored in step S2301, or if the holding notice execution lottery is not won in step S2303, the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the disconnection is executed in the same manner as in step S2307. Thereafter, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed, and the outlier fluctuation aspect setting process is ended. In the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation, the variation display mode of the symbol is set in accordance with the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2311 is stopped and displayed. When the variation display mode setting process corresponding to the actual deviation is executed, the special effect is not executed after the variation display of the symbol is started until the variation display ends.

  In the present embodiment, the special effect is executed at the game times corresponding to the result of losing based on storing the high probability matching information flag or the low probability matching information flag. By executing the special effect, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored. The first special effect is executed when the high probability coincidence information flag is stored. Thereby, when a 1st special effect is performed, the player can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is memorize | stored. Further, the second special effect is executed when a high probability match information flag or a low probability match information flag is stored. Thereby, when the 2nd special production is performed, the player can grasp that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored. In addition, the special performance is not executed unless the holding notice execution lottery is won. For this reason, even if the special performance is not executed, it is possible to make the player expect that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored.

  Furthermore, when the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag is stored, the special effect can be generated at each game time corresponding to the result of the previous winning game times. This is a device for preventing an excessive increase in the frequency at which the special performance is not executed before winning the big win despite the high probability match information flag or the low probability match information flag being stored. .

  Returning to the description of the variation start processing (FIG. 35). If it is determined in step S2202 that the game is a big win, the process proceeds to step S2204. In step S2204, the high probability match information flag and the low probability match information flag are deleted. Note that the processing of step S2204 is to clear the high probability match information flag storage area and the low probability match information flag storage area, respectively, and when each match information flag is not stored, the state is maintained.

  In a succeeding step S2205, it is determined whether or not the second coincidence information flag is stored. If second match information is stored, the process advances to step S2206. In step S2206, the second match information is deleted.

  In the subsequent step S2207, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the probability variation jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the specific symbol is finally stopped. Thereafter, in step S2208, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol corresponding to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2207 is stopped and displayed is set. When the process of step S2208 is executed, the fluctuation start process ends.

  On the other hand, if the second match information flag is not stored in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2209. In step S2209, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the register in step S2201 is information on the probability variation jackpot result, thereby determining whether or not the probability variation jackpot winning is won in the current game round. When the information on the probability variation jackpot result is stored, the processing of step S2207 and step S2208 is executed, and this variation start processing is terminated.

  In step S2209, if it is not information on the probability variation jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S2210. In step S2210, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to a normal jackpot is executed. In this process, the stop symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the normal jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbol is set so that the non-specific symbol is finally stopped. If the process of step S2210 is executed, in step S2208, the fluctuation display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed, and this fluctuation start process is terminated. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2210 is stopped and displayed.

  In this variation start process, when setting a stop symbol in the case of a big win, it is determined whether or not the second match information flag is stored, and if the second match information flag is stored, Regardless of whether the current jackpot win is a probable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, a stop symbol corresponding to the probable jackpot is set. When the second coincidence information flag is stored, when the game execution time enters the opening / closing execution mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, any of the stored information that is already stored becomes the target of the determination The mode again moves to the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, after the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the normal jackpot result is ended, the mode is again shifted to the opening / closing execution mode before the high frequency support mode is ended. Thereby, even if it is a normal jackpot result, even if the stop symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result is set, the high-frequency support mode can be prevented from being terminated without winning the jackpot. From the player's point of view, when a stop symbol corresponding to a probable jackpot is stopped and displayed, a high probability mode is set after that, so it is superior to when a stop symbol corresponding to a normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. I can feel it. As a result, an effect of increasing the player's willingness to continue the game is expected.

  In the present embodiment, when the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is executed, and the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process corresponds to the jackpot result, the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot Which of the results is supported is identified. As a result, in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, the target hold information is the target of the success / failure determination in the high probability mode in the variation start process, or the target of the determination of the success / failure in the low probability mode. Can be identified. As a result, even if a plurality of lottery modes are set, the confirmation process for the second hold notice can be favorably executed according to the specific result in the confirmation process for the first hold notice.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the timing for executing the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is different from those in the above embodiments.

<Variation start processing>
The variation start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The processing of step S2401 to step S2412 and step S2414 to step S2418 of the variation start process in the present embodiment is the same as step S701 to step S712 and step S713 to step S717 of the variation start process in the first embodiment, respectively. Therefore, explanation is omitted.

  If the variable display time setting process is executed in step S2412, the process advances to step S2413. In step S2413, special game times setting processing is executed. In the special game number setting process, it is determined whether or not the current game number is a game number corresponding to the execution of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. When the special game times setting process is executed, the processes of steps S2414 to S2418 are executed, and this variation start process is terminated.

  The special game times setting process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the current game time corresponds to a big win. Specifically, it is determined whether either a 6R jackpot flag or a 16R jackpot flag is stored. If any jackpot flag is stored, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  If the jackpot flag is not stored in step S2501, the process proceeds to step S2502. In step S2502, it is determined whether the lottery mode is the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag is stored, and when the high probability mode flag is not stored, it is determined that the low probability mode is set. When the lottery mode is not the low probability mode, that is, when the lottery mode is the high probability mode, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2502 that the lottery mode is the low probability mode, the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, it is determined whether the variable display time is a predetermined time or more. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the variable display time set in the variable display time setting process is a predetermined time or more. In the pachinko machine 10, a variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of reach and a variable display time corresponding to the non-occurrence of reach are set in advance. The variable display time corresponding to reach occurrence is set longer than the variable display time corresponding to non-reach occurrence, and one game time of 20 seconds or longer is selected. In step S2503, it is determined whether or not the variable display time in the current game time corresponds to the occurrence of reach. If the variable display time is 20 seconds or more, it is determined that the variable display time is a predetermined time or more. To do. If the variable display time is not longer than the predetermined time, the special game times setting process is terminated as it is.

  Here, in the present embodiment, a special effect as a hold notice is executed during the execution of one game. Executing the process of step S2503 is a device for determining whether or not the game times can execute the special effect.

  In step S2503, if the variable display time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time, the process proceeds to step S2504. In step S2504, special game times lottery execution processing is executed. The special game times lottery execution process is for performing a lottery to determine whether or not the current game time is a game time for executing the determination process of the confirmation process for holding notice. Specifically, when a value is acquired from the random number counter for special game times lottery provided in the lottery counter area 262 of the work RAM 254 and the acquired value corresponds to execution of the special effect, the special game time lottery Judged to win. If the special game times lottery is not won, the special game times setting process is terminated. In the present embodiment, the probability of winning the special game round execution lottery is about 1%.

  If it is determined in step S2505 that the special game times lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S2506. In step S2506, the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process execution flag storage area of the various flag storage areas 235. The confirmation process execution flag is used for grasping that the current game round is a special game round, and is used for grasping that the game round is to execute the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice. It is. The stored confirmation processing execution flag is deleted at the timing when the special game round is completed.

  In a succeeding step S2507, a special game times command is set. The set special game times command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82 in the external output process (step S401) in the normal process (FIG. 13). The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the received special game times command to the display control device 212. The special game times command includes information indicating that the current game time is a special game time. The display control device 212 can recognize that the current game time is the special game time by receiving the special game time command. When the process of step S2507 is executed, the special game times setting process is terminated.

  By executing the process of step S2501, the game times that are won by the big win will not become special game times. This is a contrivance to prevent the game times that are won by the big wins from being special game times, and the winning / incoming determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice being executed at the game times that are won by the big win.

  Further, by executing the processing of step S2502, the special game times are not caused even in the high probability mode. The low probability mode is less likely to win a big hit than in the high probability mode, and the game times corresponding to the result of losing are likely to continue. For this reason, in the low probability mode, the game is likely to be monotonous as compared to the case of the high probability mode. By executing the special game times in the low probability mode, it is possible to prevent the game in the low probability mode from becoming monotonous. In the high probability mode, the probability of winning a big hit is higher than in the low probability mode, and it is considered that the player's attention to the game is high. In order to avoid special game times in the high probability mode and special game times in the low probability mode, there is an extreme difference in the player's attention to the game between the high probability mode and the low probability mode. It is prevented from occurring.

<Confirmation process for hold notice>
In the present embodiment, a confirmation process for a hold notice is executed instead of the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the confirmation process for the second hold notice in each of the above embodiments. The confirmation process for holding notice in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process execution flag storage area. If the confirmation process execution flag is not stored, the confirmation process for the first hold notice is ended. When the confirmation process execution flag is stored, the processes after step S2602 are executed.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether undetermined hold information is stored among the hold information. The method for determining whether or not undetermined hold information is stored is the step in the first embodiment except that it is checked whether there is undetermined information for all the stored hold information. Since it is the same as S1203, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  In a succeeding step S2603, it is determined whether or not pending determination information is stored. If the undetermined hold information is not stored, the confirmation process for the hold notice is ended. When undetermined hold information is stored, the processes of steps S2604 and S2605 are executed. The processing in step S2604 and step S2605 is the same as the processing in step S1205 and step S1206 in the confirmation process for the first hold notice in the first embodiment, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  In a succeeding step S2606, the determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode is executed. In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is executed in the low probability mode. For this reason, in the success / failure determination process of step S2606, the one corresponding to the low probability mode is set.

  Thereafter, in step S2607, it is determined whether or not the result of the process in step S2606 corresponds to a big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated.

  Then, the process of step S2607 to step S2609 is executed, and the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended. The processing from step S2607 to step S2609 is performed for confirmation for the first hold notice in the first embodiment except that the coincidence information flag is stored in step S2608 and the coincidence information command is set in step S2609. Since it is the same as step S1208 to step S1210 in the process, description thereof is omitted. In this embodiment, there is no distinction between the confirmation process for the first pending notice and the confirmation process for the second pending notice, and which of the pending notice confirmation processes corresponds to the match information command and the match information command. There is no distinction.

  In the present embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is sequentially executed on the stored hold information. For this reason, the coincidence information command is set regardless of the number of stored hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning and the timing at which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process.

  Note that each of the determined flag and the coincidence information flag stored in the confirmation process for the pending notice is deleted at the timing when the special game round is completed.

<Variable display control processing>
The variable display control process executed by the display control device 212 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2701, it is determined whether or not one game is being executed. If one game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S2702. In step S2702, it is determined whether a change command has been received. If the change command has not been received, the change display control process is terminated as it is. If the change command has been received, the change start control process is terminated after the change start process is executed in step S2703.

  The variation starting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2801, it is determined whether a special game times command has been received. If the special game times command has not been received, the process proceeds to step S2802. In step S2802, as in step S2201 of the change start process in the second embodiment, game result information and change display time information are grasped.

  In the subsequent step S2803, it is specified whether or not a big hit occurs in the current game round from the grasping result in step S2802. If it is a game game in which a jackpot is generated, the process proceeds to step S2804, and a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the jackpot, the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot result is set with reference to the stop symbol table corresponding to the jackpot stored in the stop symbol table storage area stored in the program ROM 253. Specifically, the stop symbols are set so that the combination of the same symbols is finally stopped on a straight line. Thereafter, in step S2805, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the jackpot is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol set in step S2804 is stopped and displayed. When the process of step S2805 is executed, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2803 that the game is not a big win, the process proceeds to step S2806. In step S2806, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. In subsequent step S2807, a variable display mode setting process corresponding to the deviation is executed. Note that the processing of step S2806 and step S2807 is the same as step S2311 and step S2312 of the variation start processing in the second embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is determined in step S2801 that a special game times command has been received, the process advances to step S2808. In step S2808, information on the variable display time is grasped. Specifically, the fluctuation display time is grasped from the received fluctuation command.

  In the subsequent step S2809, a stop symbol setting process corresponding to the special game times is performed. Stop symbols corresponding to the special game times are set in advance. Specifically, one type of stop symbol corresponding to the special game times is set. In the stop symbol setting process, information on the preset stop symbol is read and the stop symbol is set. In subsequent step S2810, a variable display mode setting process in the special game times is executed. In this variation display mode setting process, the variation display mode of the symbol is set according to the variation display time until the stop symbol in the special game times is stopped and displayed. When the process of step S2810 is executed, the fluctuation start process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 40), if one game is being executed in step S2701, the process proceeds to step S2704. In step S2704, it is determined whether a change end command has been received. If no change end command has been received, the process advances to step S2705. In step S2705, the mid-variation process is executed. When the processing for variation is executed, the variation display control processing is terminated.

  The changing process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2901, it is determined whether a match information command has been received. If a match information command has been received, the process advances to step S2902. In step S2902, the coincidence information is stored in the corresponding area. Here, the work RAM 254 of the display control device 212 is provided with an area for storing information indicating which hold information included in the match information command corresponds to the jackpot information. Specifically, the work RAM 254 is provided with storage areas from the first area to the eighth area according to the number of hold information that can be stored. In step S2902, which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information is identified from the match information command, and the match information is stored in an area corresponding to the specified hold information. When the process of step S2902 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated.

  If a match information command has not been received in step S2901, the process advances to step S2903. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, in the display control device 212, the time during which symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1 according to the variation display time of the current game time. In the middle and lower symbol rows Z2 and Z3, the time during which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3, the time during which the symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the time during which symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The time during which symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed is determined in advance. The display control device 212 updates the elapsed counter area provided in the work RAM 254 every time the variable display control process is executed, and uses the value to grasp the period that has elapsed since the variable display was started. It is like that. In step S2903, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the variable display is started until the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed.

  If all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed in step S2903, the process proceeds to step S2904. In step S2904, it is determined whether coincidence information corresponding to the first area or the second area is stored. Specifically, in step S2902, it is determined whether the coincidence information is stored in the first area or the second area. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the first area or the second area, the process advances to step S2905. In step S2905, special effect execution processing is executed. In the special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1. When the process of step S2905 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will be awarded a big hit in the first or second game round after the special game round is completed by executing special effects until the symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper symbol row Z1. Can be grasped.

  If it is determined in step S2903 that at least some of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed, the process advances to step S2906.

  In step S2906, it is determined whether or not the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are variably displayed. Specifically, in step S2906, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the change display of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped until the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed. This determination is executed with reference to the value of the elapsed counter area, as in step S2903.

  If the lower symbol row Z3 is variably displayed in step S2906, the process proceeds to step S2907. In step S2907, it is determined whether matching information corresponding to the third area or the fourth area is stored. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the third area or the fourth area, the process advances to step S2908. In step S2908, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. When the process of step S2908 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will be awarded a big win at the 3rd game or 4th game after the special game is completed by executing special effects until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the lower symbol row Z3. Can be grasped.

  If the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed in step S2906, the process proceeds to step S2909. In step S2909, it is determined whether or not the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 are variably displayed. Specifically, in step S2909, it is determined whether or not it is a period from when the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed until the middle symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed. This determination is executed with reference to the value of the elapsed counter area, as in step S2903. If the symbol in the middle symbol row Z2 is not being displayed in a varying manner, the mid-variation processing is terminated.

  If the middle symbol row Z2 is variably displayed in step S2909, the process proceeds to step S2910. In step S2910, it is determined whether coincidence information corresponding to the fifth area or the sixth area is stored. When the coincidence information is not stored, the mid-variation process is terminated. If coincidence information is stored in the fifth area or the sixth area, the process advances to step S2911. In step S2911, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are each controlled so as to execute the special effect as a holding notice before the symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. When the process of step S2911 is executed, the mid-variation process is terminated. Players will receive a big win at the 5th or 6th game round after the special game round is completed by executing special effects until the symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row Z2. Can be grasped.

  Returning to the description of the variable display control process (FIG. 40), if a variable end command is received in step S2704, the flow proceeds to step S2706. In step S2706, it is determined whether the coincidence information is stored in the seventh area or the eighth area. If coincidence information is stored, the process advances to step S2707. In step S2707, special effect execution processing is executed. In this special effect execution process, the special display device 48 and the symbol display device 41 are controlled so that the special effect is executed before the game round is ended. After the special display is executed from the end of the variable display of the middle symbol row Z3 until the end of the game round, after the special game round of this time is over, The player can grasp that.

  If it is determined in step S2706 that the coincidence information is not stored, the process proceeds to step S2708 if the process in step S2707 is executed. In step S2708, the coincidence information is deleted. Specifically, the process of clearing each area in the work RAM 254 is executed, and when the coincidence information is not stored, the state is maintained. In a succeeding step S2709, a variation end process is executed. When the variation end process is executed, the variation display control process is terminated.

<State when special performance is performed>
An example is given and demonstrated about the case where a special effect is performed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a situation when the special effect is executed. In this example, the coincidence information is stored in the fourth area of the work RAM 254.

  As shown in FIG. 43A, when the symbols are variably displayed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the special effect is not executed. When the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed, the special display device 48 emits a lamp as shown in FIG. 43B, and the special display in which the display mode in the fourth unit hold display area Ga4 is changed. Is executed. Specifically, the special effect is executed after the symbol of the upper symbol row Z1 is stopped and displayed until the symbol of the lower symbol row Z3 is stopped and displayed.

  By grasping either the timing at which the lamp in the special display device 48 emits light or the unit hold display area where the special display has been executed, it will be a big win at any timing after the end of the current game round. The player can grasp this. Specifically, after the special game is finished, the special effect is executed after the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 are stopped and displayed until the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped. The player can grasp that the big win is won at the game round or the fourth game round. Then, after the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (c), the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 43 (d), and the special game round ends. To do.

  In this embodiment, one stop symbol corresponding to the special game times is set, but a plurality of stop symbols corresponding to the special game times may be set. Further, the stop symbol corresponding to the special game times may not be set, and the stop symbol setting process corresponding to the departure may be executed in the special game times. In this case, the stop pattern of the game times corresponding to the special game times result and the game times corresponding to the detachment are common.

  In the present embodiment, the timing at which the special effect is executed as the hold notice and the variable display mode in the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 are associated with each other. For this reason, if the player pays attention to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in order to grasp the game result, the player can understand the timing when the special effect is executed. Thus, by grasping the symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed when the special effect is executed, it is possible to grasp which holding information corresponds to the jackpot information, that is, the timing of winning the jackpot. . As a result, it is not necessary for the player to measure the timing at which the special effect is executed separately from the symbol variation display in order to understand which holding information corresponds to the jackpot winning.

  Even if the holding information corresponding to the big win is not stored, the special game times are generated. For this reason, even if special game times occur, a special effect does not always occur. As a result, in the special game times, it is possible to cause the player to play a game with the expectation that a special effect will be executed, and when the special effect is executed, the player is noted at that timing. be able to. As a result, the effect of increasing the player's attention to the game can be made remarkable.

<Fourth embodiment>
You may change the aspect in case a holding notice is performed. In this embodiment, in each opening and closing execution mode, the above-described embodiment is a holding notice mode executed when it is specified that a plurality of holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored. Is different.

  In the present embodiment, when the first hold information corresponding to jackpot and the second hold information corresponding to jackpot are stored in one opening / closing execution mode, the second hold in the one opening / closing execution mode is stored. An opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter referred to as a first opening / closing execution mode) when the first holding information is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process after the one opening / closing execution mode is completed and the hold notice corresponding to the information is executed. In the open / close execution mode corresponding to the hold information), a hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, the contents of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information executed in the one open / close execution mode are reflected, and the second hold information is supported in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first hold information. The content of the pending notice is determined.

  In addition, the second hold information in the open / close execution mode corresponding to the first hold information is higher than the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information executed in the one open / close execution mode. It is executed as a hold notice corresponding to. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of hold notices are set, and the degree of expectation that is hold information corresponding to the jackpot result differs depending on the executed hold notice. In the present embodiment, even if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning lottery, the hold notice execution lottery process is executed, and when the hold notice execution lottery is won, the hold notice is executed.

  A plurality of types of modes in which special display processing is executed and special display is executed in the unit hold display area are set as hold notices with different expectations corresponding to the jackpot result. As a plurality of types of hold notices, the colors displayed in the unit hold display area when special display is executed are set to gold, silver, copper, and white. When gold is displayed, the hold information has the highest expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result, and when white is displayed, the hold information has the lowest expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result. . Specifically, the expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result decreases in the order of gold, silver, copper, and white. Note that the display mode corresponding to each color is stored in advance in the character ROM 256.

  Incidentally, the high degree of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result is determined by the selection rate when the hold notice is executed for the hold information not corresponding to the jackpot result. For example, the ratio of the gold color selected as the special display is high when the reservation notice corresponding to the jackpot result is high, and is low when the reservation notice is not corresponding to the jackpot result.

  In the present embodiment, when a hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the contents are stored in the work RAM 254. Further, a special display table for determining the contents when executing the special display is stored in the program ROM 253. As the special display table, a table corresponding to the first round information and a table corresponding to the second round information are set.

  Multiple types of special display tables corresponding to the first round information are set according to the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information stored in the work RAM 254. When the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information is executed again in the next open / close execution mode after the one open / close execution mode, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is referred to. In this case, the special display table corresponding to the first round information referred to in accordance with the content of the hold notice corresponding to the second hold information that has been executed once is different.

  In this case, according to the contents of the hold notice already being executed (according to the contents of the stored hold notice), a special with a lower expectation than the special display selected when the hold notice is executed. A special display table is selected for which no display is selected. For example, when it is stored that the hold notice corresponding to the copper color has been executed, the contents of this hold notice are determined with reference to a special display table in which white is not selected.

  In addition, when determining the content of the hold notice from the special display table, the random numbers for the effect lottery are in a certain range, and the distribution of the effects is different in each special display table. Specifically, a table in which white is not selected, a table in which white and copper are not selected, and a table in which white, copper and silver are not selected are provided. In other words, a plurality of tables are set in which the types of effects with low expectations are excluded so that the types of effects with low expectations are not selected.

  Further, each special display table that determines the content of the effect of the hold notice in the open / close execution mode is set in correspondence with the fact that a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot are stored. Specifically, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is for the jackpot corresponding hold information that is first subject to the fluctuation start process regardless of whether or not a plurality of jackpot corresponding hold information is stored. Applied. In addition, the special display table corresponding to the second round information, when a plurality of pieces of hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored, the success / failure determination process in the change start process at a timing later than the hold information that is the first jackpot winning winning It is applied to hold information corresponding to jackpot corresponding to the target.

  In the special display table corresponding to the first round information and the special display table corresponding to the second round information, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is selected to have higher expectation corresponding to the jackpot result. It is easy. In other words, the effect selection rate is set so that the special display table corresponding to the first round information is more likely to be selected for the player than the special display table corresponding to the second round information. ing.

  Further, the special display table corresponding to the first round information is determined according to the content of the hold notice corresponding to the stored second hold information. In the special display table corresponding to the second round information, it is easier to select an effect having a lower expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than any of the special display tables corresponding to the plurality of first round information.

  As described above, when a hold notice is executed multiple times in one open / close execution mode, the content of the hold notice executed on the front side is changed to a jackpot result rather than the content of the hold notice executed on the back side. Increasing the corresponding degree of expectation is a device for causing the player to pay attention to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. According to the present embodiment, when a holding notice is executed a plurality of times in one opening / closing execution mode, when the player's attention is increased by the holding notice on the front side and the holding notice on the back side is executed. , It is possible to prevent the degree of attention with respect to the reservation notice on the destination side from decreasing.

  Further, with respect to the hold information corresponding to the hold notice executed on the rear side, there is an opportunity to execute the hold notice again in the later opening / closing execution mode. In other words, for the hold information corresponding to the hold notice executed on the rear side, there is an opportunity to execute the hold notice twice, and the hold notice executed for the second time according to the contents of the hold notice executed first. It is easier to select a content with a higher expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than the content of the hold notice executed first. As a result, when the hold notice is executed multiple times in one opening and closing execution mode, the content of the hold notice executed on the back side corresponds to the jackpot result rather than the content of the hold notice executed on the front side. Even if the expected level is low, in the next opening / closing execution mode, the high level of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result is executed on the hold information corresponding to the above-described hold notice on the rear side. Therefore, when a holding notice is executed multiple times in one opening and closing execution mode, even if a low-priority outcome corresponding to the jackpot result is executed for the rear one, the holding information corresponding to the subsequent holding notice is executed. It is possible to prevent the player's attention level from becoming extremely low.

  In addition, when executing the hold notice multiple times in one open / close execution mode, the contents of the special display selected in the hold notice executed first are stored, and the special display in the hold notice executed later is It is also possible to select an item with a lower expectation level corresponding to the jackpot result than the special display selected in the hold notice executed first.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, when the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, the degree of expectation in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored is notified. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the hold notice is executed when the ending display in the opening / closing execution mode is being executed. Whether or not to hold the hold notice is determined by lottery, and the hold notice can be executed even if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is not stored. That is, in the hold notice in the present embodiment, the player is notified of the degree of expectation that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored. By the way, there are multiple types of hold notice contents, and the high expectation level for jackpot is stored as the selection rate when the hold information for jackpot is stored and the hold information for jackpot is stored. And the selectivity when not.

  Note that when the hold notice is executed, the background color displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the ending display is different. Specifically, gold, silver, copper, and white are set as background colors displayed on the symbol display device 41. And the expectation degree in which the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the order of gold, silver, copper, and white decreases.

  In this embodiment, when a hold notice is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the contents of the hold notice are stored. Hereinafter, a case will be described in which hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in the open / close execution mode, and a hold notice corresponding to the hold information is executed.

  In one open / close execution mode, specific hold information corresponding to jackpot is stored, and when a hold notice corresponding to the hold information is executed, the content of the hold notice selected at that time is stored in the work RAM 254. Is done.

  When the above opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the specific hold information is entered, the hold notice is executed in a situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is not stored. A hold notice different from the stored contents of the hold notice is selected. Specifically, a special display table for removal when no hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored is stored in the program ROM 253 in advance. A plurality of special removal display tables are set according to the contents of the stored advance notice, and are set so that the same contents as the stored advance notice are not selected.

  For this reason, when a holding notice is executed in a situation where the one opening / closing execution mode ends and then the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the specific holding information is entered, a holding notice similar to the stored holding notice is issued. When executed, the player can be informed that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored. Here, the stored content of the hold notice is erased at the timing when all the hold information stored at the timing when the opening / closing execution mode ends is exhausted. As a result, when the hold notice is executed in one opening / closing execution mode, the hold information stored in the one opening / closing execution mode as a predetermined period is determined as the object of the determination process in the variation start process. By the way, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the degree of expectation to deal with the jackpot can be varied according to the content of the pending notice.

  With this configuration, the player pays attention to the contents when the hold notice is executed. Further, when the hold information stored in the one opening / closing execution mode becomes a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process and shifts to the opening / closing execution mode, the contents of the hold notice being executed and the current execution are executed. The player plays a game paying attention to the contents of the hold notice. Thereby, a player can be made to pay attention to the contents of the held reservation notice over a plurality of opening / closing execution modes. As a result, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player's attention to the game is increased.

  In addition, after the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode is entered again within the predetermined period, and the hold notice is stored in the situation where the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored in the opening / closing execution mode. Is executed, a hold notice having the same content as the contents of the hold notice that is always stored may be executed.

  Further, the predetermined period may be changed. For example, the predetermined period may be from when one opening / closing execution mode ends until a predetermined number of games elapses. In this case, in the configuration in which the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode ends when the predetermined number of games has elapsed, the number of games until the high probability mode or the high frequency support mode ends is set as the predetermined period. Also good. In this case, the held reservation notice is stored, and the timing for erasing the stored reservation notice is the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. Then, the content of the hold notice to be executed may be determined according to the content of the stored hold notice.

  Moreover, you may change the timing which performs a hold notice. The hold notice in this configuration may be executed at the special game times in the third embodiment. In this case, the contents of the hold notice to be executed may be determined according to the contents of the hold notice stored when the special game times are reached before the predetermined period elapses. In this configuration, it is only necessary to notify whether or not hold information corresponding to jackpot is stored at a predetermined timing of special game times.

  In the fourth and fifth embodiments, the method of notifying the degree of expectation corresponding to the jackpot result when the hold notice is executed may be changed. For example, the player may be informed of the degree of expectation that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot is stored by the effect executed by the display lamp unit 63 and the speaker unit 64.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In this embodiment, the jackpot result and the normal processing are different from those in the first embodiment. The different points will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a distribution table in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, an 8R normal jackpot result (hereinafter also simply referred to as a normal jackpot result in this embodiment) and an 8R probability variable jackpot result (hereinafter also simply referred to as a probability variation jackpot result in this embodiment) are set. In the case of a normal jackpot result, the low probability mode is set as the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode until the predetermined number of games (50) has elapsed. . In addition, when a probable big hit result is obtained, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the high probability mode is set as the lottery mode and the high frequency support mode is set as the support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained until a jackpot result is obtained again.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the jackpot result is based on the winning to the upper working port 33 and the jackpot result is based on the winning to the lower working port 34 The distribution table is referenced. That is, even if any of the operation ports 33, 34 is won, the allocation of the jackpot result is the same.

  In the variation start process according to the present embodiment, after the type of jackpot result is specified with reference to the distribution table, a stop result setting process corresponding to each jackpot result is executed. In addition, as a jackpot flag corresponding to each jackpot result, a normal jackpot flag is stored in a corresponding flag storage area if the jackpot result is a normal jackpot result, and a probability variation jackpot flag is stored in a corresponding flag storage area if it is a probability variation jackpot result. Each jackpot flag is deleted when the end processing of the opening / closing execution mode in the game state transition processing is executed.

<Normal processing>
Normal processing in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process structure (step S3001-step S3004, step S3007-step S3009) same as the normal process (FIG. 13) in 1st Embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the second game state transition process (step S406) and the second hold notice confirmation process (step S408) in the normal process of the first embodiment are not executed. Then, the game state transition process (step S3005) is executed instead of the first game state transition process (step S405), and the hold notice confirmation process (step S407) is substituted for the first hold notice confirmation process (step S407). S3006) is executed. These processes will be described.

  First, the gaming state transition process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In addition, description is abbreviate | omitted about the process structure (step S3101-step S3104) same as the 1st game state transfer process (FIG. 17) in 1st Embodiment.

  In this gaming state transition process, after the start of the round display process in step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105, and “8” is set in the round counter area RC. In steps S3106 to S3108, processing for determining a display effect performed in the current opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  Specifically, in this embodiment, as a round effect performed during the round in the opening / closing execution mode, a special round effect in which a hold notice effect corresponding to the hold notice is executed, and a normal round effect that does not correspond to the hold notice And are set. In step S3106 to step S3108, a display effect to be executed in the current opening / closing execution mode is selected in correspondence with the gaming state when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, it is determined in step S3106 whether the high frequency support flag is set. If the high frequency support flag is set, a special round effect is selected in step S3107. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the special round effect is set.

  On the other hand, if the high frequency support flag is not set, the process advances to step S3108 to select a normal round effect. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the normal round effect is set.

  That is, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode during the high-frequency support mode, a special round effect for performing the holding notice effect is selected, and when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode during the low-frequency support mode, the holding notice effect is displayed. A normal round effect that is not performed is selected. As already described, since the high frequency support mode is a mode in which the expectation of entering the lower operation port 34 is higher than that of the low frequency support mode, the number of held information in the high frequency support mode is low frequency support mode. More than that of the mode.

  Note that the high frequency support flag setting or erasing process is executed in the transition process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the high frequency support flag is set when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, The state where the high-frequency support flag is set is maintained until the transition process after the opening / closing execution mode is completed.

  Further, during the opening / closing execution mode, the low frequency support mode is set regardless of the presence or absence of the high frequency support flag.

  After executing the processing of step S3107 or step S3108, in step S3109, “100” is set in the timer area T as an effect period for opening. As described above, the numerical information set in the timer area T is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the timer interrupt process is started. Therefore, the opening production period is 0.2 sec.

  Thereafter, an opening command is set in step S3110, and the gaming state transition process is terminated. The opening command includes the specific information set in step S3107 or step S3108. When receiving the opening command, the display control device 212 executes a process for performing the opening, and also executes a process for storing the specific information in the work RAM 254 as a storage unit. This makes it possible to grasp which effect is to be performed in the display control device 212.

  The processes in steps S3111 to S3116 are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the transition process after the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S3114, and the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S3114 is the first. Since this is the same as the migration process (FIG. 30) of the second embodiment, description of these processes will be omitted.

  Next, the confirmation process for holding notice will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the confirmation process for the preliminary notice of hold, whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is stored is specified, and the process corresponding to the specified result is executed.

  First, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not it is an opening / closing execution mode. If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended as it is, while if it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the process related to confirmation of the reservation notice in steps S3202 to S3210 is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, processing related to confirmation of the pending notice is executed in a situation where the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, as already described, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the opening is first performed. The opening production period is set to be longer than the period required to execute the process related to the confirmation of the hold notice for all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb. Specifically, the opening effect period (0.2 sec) is set longer than the period (0.032 sec) required for the confirmation process for the reservation notice to be performed for the total number of pieces of reservation information (eight times). As a result, confirmation of the hold notice for each hold information is completed at a timing prior to the start of the first round.

  Specifically, first, in step S3202, the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is specified from the stored hold information. Specifically, based on the presence / absence of the hold information in each hold area Ra, Rb, the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process is specified. Then, with reference to the determined flag storage area provided in the various flag storage areas 235, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process of the hold notice is stored.

  In the following step S3203, it is determined whether or not the hold information that is not the target of the determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is stored as a result of the check process in step S3202. If the hold information that is not the target of the success / failure determination process is not stored, the confirmation process for the previous hold notice is finished as it is, while the hold information that is not the target of the determination process is stored, The success / failure determination process of S3204 to S3208 is executed.

  Specifically, in step S3204, from the information for determining the big hit out of the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice in the current process, that is, the information updated by the big hit random number counter C1. Know the acquired information.

  After that, in step S3205, the determined flag is stored in the area corresponding to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the hold notice confirmation process.

  In a succeeding step S3206, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode is set when the current opening / closing execution mode ends. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and when the probability variation jackpot flag is stored, it is determined that the mode is the high probability mode.

  If it is determined in step S3206 that the high probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S3207. In step S3207, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3206 that the high probability mode is not set, that is, if it is determined that the low probability mode is set, the process proceeds to step S3208. In step S3208, the determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed.

  After execution of the process of step S3207 or step S3208, the process proceeds to step S3209. In step S3209, it is determined whether or not the result of the success / failure determination process in step S3207 or step S3208 corresponds to the big win. If the jackpot winning is not supported, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S3209 that the jackpot is won, the process proceeds to step S3210. In step S3210, a coincidence information command is set. This coincidence information command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 82. The sound lamp control device 82 transmits the coincidence information command to the display control device 212. Thereby, the display control apparatus 212 can grasp | ascertain that the pending | holding information corresponding to the jackpot result is memorize | stored. If the coincidence information command is set in step S3210, the confirmation process for the reservation notice is ended.

  The match information command is received in a match information reception process executed in the display control device 212, as in the first embodiment. Then, the round information corresponding to the matching information is stored based on the reception of the matching information command in the matching information receiving process. As described in the first embodiment, the coincidence information command includes information indicating which hold information corresponds to the jackpot information, and the variation start process based on the hold information is performed. The game times to be performed can be specified. For this reason, in the coincidence information reception process, the work RAM 254 is provided with round information that specifies the number of games of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information and specifies the round in which the hold notice is made based on the specified result. Store in the round information storage area.

  Here, in this embodiment, the number (8) of hold information that can be stored in each hold area Ra, Rb and the number of rounds (8 rounds) executed in the open / close execution mode are set to be the same. Each round is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the order in which the determination processing of the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is performed. Specifically, the nth (n: natural number of 1 to 8) round is associated with the hold information related to the nth change start process after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Thereby, for example, when the hold information related to the seventh variation start process corresponds to the jackpot information, the round information corresponding to the seventh round is stored in the round information storage area.

  Note that the determined flag that has been stored after the confirmation process for holding notice is deleted when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the confirmation process for the hold notice is configured to confirm the hold notice for one hold information per process time, but is not limited to this. For example, the hold notice for a plurality of hold information per process time It is good also as a structure which confirms. Specifically, the process from step S3204 to step S3210 may be looped until there is no pending determination pending information. However, focusing on the point of avoiding the occurrence of so-called processing failure due to local increase in processing load in one processing time, the configuration in which the confirmation of the holding notice for one holding information per processing time is confirmed. preferable.

<Round display start processing>
Next, the round display start processing in the present embodiment will be described using the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3301, it is determined whether or not the round effect related to the current opening / closing execution mode is a special round effect. Specifically, by referring to the specific information included in the opening command, it is determined whether the round effect related to the current opening / closing execution mode is a special round effect or a normal round effect. And determination processing is performed based on the said grasping result.

  When the round effect is a normal round effect, the normal round effect process in steps S3302 to S3305 is executed. Specifically, in step S3302, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the round effect. Specifically, the round effect is set to be performed from the start timing of the first round. For this reason, in step S3302, it is determined whether an open command corresponding to the first round is received. The release command includes information on how many rounds it is.

  When the release command corresponding to the first round is received, the process proceeds to step S3303, the normal round effect is set, and the round display start process is ended. The normal round effect is a series of effects performed from the start timing of the first round to the end timing of the final round (eighth round). In step S3303, a data table corresponding to the normal round effect is set.

  Here, the data table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying a moving image (movie) on the display screen G is determined, and the moving image is displayed by updating the image based on the data table. The

  In the data table corresponding to the normal round effect, movies are set individually for each round, and each movie is a continuous series of movies. Specifically, there is a common appearance character in each movie. The display mode of the movie end state corresponding to a predetermined round (excluding the fourth round) and the display mode of the movie start state corresponding to the next round with respect to the predetermined round are set to be the same. .

  In addition, the movie playback period for each round is longer than the combined period of the round period, which is a period required to digest one round, and the interval period, which is the closing period of the big prize opening 32a provided between the rounds. It is set short. When the movie ends during the round or interval, the display mode in the ended state is set to be maintained. As a result, the movie set for each round ends during the corresponding round or the interval after the round regardless of the fluctuation of the round period, and the subsequent display mode becomes the display mode of the movie end state. ing.

  In step S3303, a data table corresponding to the normal round effect is set, and a movie corresponding to the first round set in the data table is started. As a result, a movie corresponding to the first round flows.

  Further, when performing a normal round effect, the audio lamp control device 82 is set so that music corresponding to the normal round effect flows through the speaker unit 64.

  On the other hand, if it is not the start timing, a negative determination is made in step S3302, and the process proceeds to step S3304. In step S3304, it is determined whether it is a movie update timing. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of each round (whether or not an open command has been received).

  If it is not the update timing, the round display start process is terminated as it is. If it is the update timing, the process proceeds to step S3305, the normal round effect update process is performed, and the round display start process is terminated. Specifically, the movie to be played is updated so that display of the next movie is started with respect to the previously set movie. As a result, a movie corresponding to each round is played back, and a series of movies are played back over a plurality of rounds (8 rounds).

  An effect mode of the normal round effect, specifically, a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the normal round effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a series of effect modes of a normal round effect, and FIGS. 49A to 49H are descriptions for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at the start timing of each round. FIG.

  In the normal round effect, a series of movies in which a girl character approaches as time passes is reproduced over 1 to 4 rounds. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49A, a girl character having a staff in the center of the display screen G is displayed small in the first round. In the upper left portion of the display screen G, “1R” is displayed as the current round number, and “8R” indicating the total round number is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (d), as the number of rounds is increased, the girl character is gradually displayed larger and the number of the current round is updated.

  Thereafter, the scene is switched, and a series of movies in which the tree fairy and the girl character gradually approach as time passes are reproduced over 5 to 8 rounds. Specifically, when the fifth round is started, a tree fairy character and a girl character in a sitting position are displayed at both ends of the display screen G as shown in FIG. In addition, the current round number is updated to “5”.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (f) to FIG. 49 (h), as the number of rounds is increased, the tree fairy character and the girl character are gradually scrolled so that the number of rounds is changed. Updated.

  That is, in the normal land effect, a series of movies in which a common character (girl character) appears is reproduced over 1 to 8 rounds. In particular, in rounds 1 to 4 (or rounds 5 to 8), since the display mode is continuous between the rounds, it is easy to recognize that it is a series of movies.

  In the normal round effect, music corresponding to the normal round effect continues to flow over 1 to 8 rounds.

  Returning to the description of the round display start process (FIG. 48), if the current round effect is a special round effect, an affirmative decision is made in step S3301 and the process proceeds to step S3306. In step S3306, it is determined whether it is the start timing of each round. Specifically, it is determined whether an open command has been received. If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated as it is, whereas if the release command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3307.

  In step S3307, a round information grasping process is executed. In the round information grasping process, it is grasped whether the round information is memorized, and when the round information is memorized, it is grasped how many rounds the special effect as the holding notice effect is executed. .

  In a succeeding step S3308, it is determined whether or not the current round corresponds to the round information. Specifically, the round information grasped in step S3307 is compared with the information on the number of rounds included in the release command, and it is determined whether or not the comparison results match.

  If the comparison results match, a data table corresponding to the special effect is set in step S3309, and the round display start process ends. On the other hand, if the comparison results do not match, it means that the hold information corresponding to this round does not correspond to the jackpot information, or the hold information corresponding to this round is not stored. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3310, a data table corresponding to the off effect is set as the hold notice effect, and the round display start process ends.

  The hold notice effect (special effect and off effect) is an effect performed in round units, unlike the normal round effect. Specifically, the data table corresponding to the hold notice effect is set corresponding to one round. In step S3309 and step S3310, a data table corresponding to the hold notice effect is set, and reproduction of a moving image (movie) prepared in advance in the set data table is started. Thereby, on the display screen G, the reproduction of the moving image (movie) corresponding to the special effect (or the off effect) is started.

  In addition, when performing the hold notice effect, the sound lamp control device 82 is set so that music corresponding to the special effect (or off effect) is played via the speaker unit 64 for each round.

  The display mode displayed on the display screen G in the hold notice effect will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a series of effect modes of each effect. FIG. 50A shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G at the start timing of the round in each effect. FIG. 50B shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the off effect, and FIG. 50C shows a display mode displayed on the display screen G in the special effect.

  First, when the round is started, as shown in FIG. 50 (a), it is displayed that the girl character holds up the wand while casting a spell for transforming, and the girl character is surrounded by dazzling light along with the spell. Is displayed. The dazzling light wraps not only the girl character but also the entire display screen G. The display mode from the start timing of the round until the dazzling light wraps the entire display screen G is common to both the special effect and the off effect.

  Thereafter, in the off-stage effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the girl character that falls on the floor as the light stops and transforms is displayed, and the off-stage effect ends. Accordingly, it is possible to grasp that the hold information corresponding to the round in which the off-line effect is performed does not correspond to the jackpot information.

  On the other hand, in the special effect, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), the girl character that is enlarged as the light is settled and successfully transformed is displayed, and the special effect ends. Thereby, it is possible to grasp that the hold information corresponding to the round in which the special effect is performed corresponds to the jackpot information. That is, it can be said that the hold notice effect is an effect in which the subsequent display mode differs according to the branch of transformation.

  Here, the hold notice effect (special effect and off effect) is set to start from the start timing of each round, specifically, the timing at which the release command is received. And the result notification required period, which is a period from the start timing of the hold notice effect to the timing at which the result of the hold notice can be specified in the hold notice effect, in particular, the timing when the display mode specific to the special effect or the off effect is obtained. Is set shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. Specifically, the result notification required period includes a minimum period of the round period, specifically, a period required for 10 game balls to be launched (0.6 × 10 = 6 sec) and an interval period (2 sec). The period is shorter than the combined period (8 sec) (for example, 5 sec). As a result, the result of the pending notice can be specified during the corresponding round or during the interval period after the round.

<Various effects performed in the opening / closing execution mode>
Next, various round effects performed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart of FIG. 51 illustrates a situation in which the probability variation jackpot is won during the low frequency support mode, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and the probability variation jackpot is again won during the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. To do. In this case, the hold information related to the second and sixth change start processes after the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot information among the hold information acquired when the probability change jackpot is again reached. Assume. In FIG. 51, for the convenience of explanation, the opening period and the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode are omitted.

  At the timing of t1, the game round corresponding to the probability variation jackpot winning is finished, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the support mode at the time of transition to the opening / closing execution mode is the low-frequency support mode, the normal round effect is selected as the round effect. The normal round effect is executed until the timing t2 when the opening / closing execution mode ends after 8 rounds.

  Based on the end of the opening / closing execution mode at the timing of t2, the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode. Thereby, the expectation degree of the ball entering the lower working port 34 is increased, and the number of pieces of reserved information to be acquired is increased.

  In addition, since the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb are provided separately, the high-frequency support mode is entered, and it is possible to enter the lower operation port 34. As a result, the storage area for storing the hold information is substantially increased. That is, in the low-frequency support mode, the hold information stored in the second result display holding area Rb is substantially 0, and thus there are substantially four storage areas in which the hold information is stored. Since the hold information can be stored in the second result display section hold area Rb, the number of storage areas for storing the hold information is substantially eight.

  Thereafter, after a plurality of game times, when the game times corresponding to the probability variation jackpot winning are again completed at the timing of t3, the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result. In this case, since the support mode at the time of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the special round effect is selected as the round effect, and the hold notice effect is executed in each round.

  Here, since the hold information related to the second and sixth fluctuation start processing corresponds to the jackpot information after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode, first, in the first round, a release effect is performed as a hold notice effect. Is called. In this case, the result notification required period in the off-stage effect is set shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, so the result of the hold notice is released at a timing before the start timing of the second round. It is notified that it is. As a result, it is possible to grasp that the determination result in the first fluctuation start process after the end of the current opening / closing execution mode is out of date.

  Then, the special effect is performed as the hold notice effect at the timing t4 which is the start timing of the second round. In this case, the notice required period as a result of the special effect is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, as in the case of the off-effect, so at a timing before the start timing of the third round. It is notified that the result of the hold notice is a big hit. As a result, after the current opening / closing execution mode ends, it is possible to grasp that the determination result in the second variation start process is a big hit.

  Thereafter, the off effects are performed at the timings t5 to t7, which are the start timings of the third to fifth rounds, and the special effects are executed at the timing of t6, which is the start timing of the sixth round.

  Then, at the timing of t9 to t10, which is the start timing of the seventh to eighth rounds, the off effects are performed, respectively, and the opening / closing execution mode ends at the timing of t11.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The round effect in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode is different from the round effect in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high frequency support mode. Specifically, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high-frequency support mode, a special round effect for performing the hold notice effect is selected as the round effect. Then, the order of the rounds in which the hold notice effect is executed is associated with the order in which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp which of the hold information the notification of the hold notice is informed by knowing which round the hold notice effect is executed in the opening / closing execution mode. Can do.

  In addition, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode, a normal round effect that does not perform the hold notice effect is performed as the round effect. This prevents the hold notice effect from being executed in a situation where the hold information is relatively small. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the repetition of substantially meaningless effects that may occur due to the small number of reserved information.

  In other words, in the round where there is no corresponding hold information, the off effect is performed. The off-line effect is not based on whether the hold information is appropriate or not, and is an effect corresponding to the absence of hold information, and can be said to be a substantially meaningless effect. If the effect is repeatedly executed, the player may be less interested in the game. However, if it is configured to perform another effect instead of the effect, there is a concern about an increase in the amount of data and an increase in processing load related to the other effect, and the other effect is a pending notice effect. There is a risk of misunderstanding.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is not executed in a situation where the hold information is relatively small, and thus the substantially meaningless effect is not easily repeated. Thereby, the fall of attention to the game which may arise by repeating the said substantially meaningless effect can be suppressed.

  As a normal round production, a series of production executed across multiple rounds was set. Thereby, it is possible to perform an effect that continues for a long period of time that is not set in the individual effects for each round, and it is possible to diversify the round effects. In addition, when performing an effect that lasts for a long period of time, the effect spans a plurality of rounds, so the period required to digest each round becomes longer by extending the round period according to the effect. Does not cause any inconvenience.

  In particular, when selecting a special round effect that performs a hold notice effect in the situation of the low frequency support mode, an effect of playing a series of movies instead of a substantially meaningless hold notice effect in rounds 5 to 8 A configuration for executing the above is also conceivable. In this case, the period that can be secured for the effect is a period required to digest 5 to 8 rounds, and is shorter than the effect period of the normal round effect. For this reason, the freedom degree of a round production falls.

  On the other hand, according to this Embodiment, when it is the low frequency support mode, since it was set as the structure which does not perform a reservation notice effect, the production period which performs a series of effects can be ensured long. Thereby, the freedom degree of a round production can be raised and diversification of a round production can be aimed at.

  In particular, since the hold notice effect is not executed in the low frequency support mode, the hold notice effect effect period for the hold information corresponding to the upper limit number of hold expected in the low frequency support mode is set to the normal round effect. It can be set as the production period. As a result, it is possible to set the production period of a series of productions displayed in the normal round production longer than the production period of the hold notice production related to the hold information corresponding to the upper limit number of hold expected in the low frequency support mode. In general, the degree of freedom of the round production can be increased.

  Note that the upper limit number of holds expected in the low frequency support mode is the upper limit number of the total number of holds stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb in the low frequency support mode. This is the number (four) of storable information that can be stored based on the ball entering the upper working port 33 which is the ball entry portion on the side where the object 34a is not provided.

  The number of rounds in the open / close execution mode and the number of hold information that can be stored in each hold area Ra and Rb are set to be the same. Then, the hold information related to the hold notice and the number of rounds are set in a one-to-one correspondence. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp what number of the hold information related to the hold notice is determined to be true or false by grasping the round number.

  In the above-described embodiment, the special round effect is configured to perform the hold notice effect (special effect or off effect) for each hold information. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, predetermined hold information ( For example, it is good also as a structure which performs a holding | maintenance notice effect in the round which concerns on the order in which the determination process is performed is the even-numbered holding information). In this case, since the effect period can be ensured for the effect period of the hold notice effect related to other hold information, a series of effects different from the hold notice effect can be executed in the secured effect period.

  In the above embodiment, when the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot information, it is configured to execute the off effect. However, even if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot information, the lottery is selected. It is good also as a structure which performs special production when winning. In this case, it is preferable that the same special effect related to the hold information corresponding to one jackpot information is repeatedly executed a plurality of times. For example, when the hold information related to the first success / failure determination process after the end of the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the jackpot information, the special effects are continuously performed in the first round, the second round, and the third round. It may be configured to be executed. Thereby, expectation to jackpot is raised by performing a special effect continuously. However, from the viewpoint of increasing the relevance between the order of the success / failure determination process and the round in which the special effect is executed, a configuration in which the execution is performed once is preferable.

  In this embodiment, a movie corresponding to each round is set in the data table corresponding to the normal round effect, and a plurality of series of movies are updated by updating the movie to be played based on the start timing of the round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a movie that spans a plurality of specific rounds (for example, five rounds) is prepared in advance, and the movie is played in the eighth round from the start timing of the first round. It is good also as a structure which is made to loop and reproduce | regenerate until the end timing of. In this case, during the period of the movie per loop, the upper limit number of holdings expected to be stored in each holding area Ra, Rb in the low frequency support mode (the first result display area holding area related to the upper operation port 33) It is preferable to set the production period of the hold notice effect related to the hold information for the number of holds that can be stored in Ra, more specifically, the period required to digest only 1 to 4 rounds. Thereby, the freedom degree of a movie can be raised.

  In addition, although the scene change is set in the movie of the normal round effect, it may be a movie in which the scene change does not exist. Thereby, it can be made easy to recognize that it is a series of movies.

  In the normal round effect, a common character is displayed throughout each round. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a second character different from the predetermined first character may be displayed. In this case, in order to recognize that the movie is a series of movies, the movie may be set to a movie in which the second character fades in while the first character fades out.

  In the above embodiment, the same applies when the hold information corresponding to the predetermined round does not correspond to the jackpot information or when the hold information corresponding to the predetermined round is not stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the executed effects may be varied. In this case, it is possible to reduce monotonization of the game that can be caused by repeatedly performing the same performance.

  In this embodiment, the main control device 81 determines the round effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display control device 212 may determine the round effect. In this case, information for specifying the current support mode may be transmitted in accordance with the transmission of the opening command. And in the round display start process in the display control apparatus 212, it is good to perform the process of step S3106-step S3108.

  Moreover, in this Embodiment, although the notification required period was set the same as a result of a special effect and a deviant effect, it is not restricted to this, You may make both differ.

  In addition, the notification required period as a result of the hold notice effect is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period, but is not limited to this, and the round period and details are set to be shorter than the shortest period of the round period. May be.

  Furthermore, the notification required period as a result of the hold notice effect may be set to be the same as the round period. In this case, a common movie having a display mode common to both the special effect and the off-effect and a separate movie having a display mode individually set for both effects are prepared separately. The display control device 212 may start the reproduction of the common movie when the release command is received, and start the playback of the individual movie corresponding to the current round when the close command is received.

  Furthermore, although the production start timing of both the special production and the off production is set to be the same as the round start timing, the production start timing is not limited to this, and may be configured to start from a mid-round timing. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which an effect start timing differs with a special effect and a removal effect. The point is that the notification of the result of the hold notice in the special effect and the off effect may be performed during the round corresponding to the hold information or during the interval after that round.

  In addition, the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode and the total number of hold information (total number of holds) that can be stored in each hold area Ra and Rb are set to be the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this. You may set more. In this case, since the effect period of the normal round effect executed in the low frequency support mode can be secured longer, the degree of freedom of the normal round effect can be further increased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds is set to be larger than the expected upper limit number in the low frequency support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds may be set smaller than the upper limit number of reservations. . In this case, the number of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect may be set as the above hold upper limit number, and the hold notice effect related to other hold information may not be executed, and a plurality of pieces of hold information are associated with one round. It is good also as a structure. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the effect period of the normal round effect can be secured for a long time, a configuration in which the number of rounds is set to be larger than the expected reduction on hold in the low frequency support mode is preferable.

  Further, the number of rounds may be set equal to or less than the number of reserved storages that can be substantially stored in the low frequency support mode. In this case, the round effect set when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode may be the special round effect. Even in this case, a meaningless effect corresponding to the absence of the hold information is difficult to be executed.

  On the other hand, the number of rounds may be set to be larger than the number of reserved memories that can be substantially stored in the low frequency support mode. In this case, it is good also as a structure which performs a pending | holding announcement effect when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode. As a result, a round that does not correspond to the hold information may occur. Therefore, a series of effects may be performed using a period in which the round is performed.

  In addition, in the case where the hold information of one of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is preferentially digested, specifically, the hold information related to the priority working port is stored, the storage is stored. Even if the hold information related to the non-priority side operation port acquired at a timing earlier than the hold information being stored is stored, the hold information related to the priority side operation port may be the target of the determination process. Good. In this case, the lower operation port 34 is set as the priority side operation port, and the upper operation port 33 is set as the non-priority side operation port, so that there is no discrepancy between the hold notice effect and the corresponding round. be able to.

  That is, if the hold information related to the priority side operation port is acquired after the hold notification effect corresponding to the hold information related to the non-priority side operation port is executed, the hold information related to the hold notification effect is determined Since the order in which the determination process is performed is changed, the hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the non-priority side operation opening does not correspond to the round in which the hold notice effect is performed.

  On the other hand, when the lower operation port 34 is set as the priority-side operation port, the game balls are not practically entered into the lower operation port 34 during the opening / closing execution mode, so the order is changed. Absent. Thereby, the occurrence of the mismatch can be avoided.

  Further, in the configuration in which the upper working port 33 is set as the priority side working port and the lower working port 34 is set as the non-priority side working port, the hold notice corresponding to the hold information related to the priority side working port is provided. It may be configured to perform only the production. Thereby, the inconsistency can be avoided.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb are separately provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is good also as a structure which provides the 1 hold area which can memorize | store, and memorize | stores the hold information which concerns on each operation port 33,34 in the said 1 hold area without distinguishing. Even in this case, the number of hold information expected to be stored in one hold area is different between the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode.

  Even in such a configuration, since the high frequency support mode has a higher expectation for entering the lower operation port 34 than the low frequency support mode, the hold information is easily acquired. For this reason, it can be said that the high-frequency support mode has a relatively large amount of pending information than the low-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether the round effect is a normal round effect or a special round effect according to the support mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, depending on the type of jackpot It is good also as a structure which determines a round production. Specifically, a special round effect may be performed in the case of a promiscuous jackpot, while a normal round effect may be performed in the case of a normal jackpot.

  Here, in the case of a probable big hit, a determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 47) (step 3207). Thereby, the probability that the hold information stored in each hold area Ra, Rb corresponds to the jackpot information is high. Therefore, it is difficult for the off-stage effect to be repeatedly executed. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the degree of attention to the game that may be caused by repeatedly executing the off-line effect when performing the hold notice effect.

  On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, a determination process corresponding to the low probability mode is executed in the confirmation process for holding notice (FIG. 47) (step S3208). Thereby, the probability that the hold information stored in each hold area Ra, Rb corresponds to the jackpot information is low. Therefore, if the holding notice effect is executed in the case of a normal jackpot, there is a high possibility that the disapproval effect will be performed continuously. On the other hand, in the case of a normal jackpot, by executing the normal round effect, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the off effect is continuously performed.

  In addition, even when a normal round effect is performed, the process related to the confirmation for the hold notice is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when performing the normal round effect, the process related to the confirmation for the hold notice is performed. It is good also as a structure which does not perform a process. Thereby, the processing load can be reduced.

  Moreover, in the opening / closing execution mode, one opening / closing of the big winning opening 32a is set as one round, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the opening / closing operation of the big winning opening 32a may be performed multiple times. Good. In this case, the end condition of one round is that the total opening period in the plurality of opening / closing operations is 30 sec (high frequency time), or the number of winning prizes to the big winning opening 32a based on the plurality of opening / closing operations is 10 It may be set to be the number (high frequency number).

  In the present embodiment, the hold notice effect is performed during the round game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold notice effect may be provided during the opening or ending. For example, when the mode is the low-frequency support mode and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, a hold notice effect may be performed by opening or ending. In this case, the mode of the hold notice effect may be a mode in which the period is not divided for each hold information.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which performs a reservation notice effect in the state which is not an opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, in this embodiment, a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot are provided, and it is configured to determine which jackpot is a lottery by lottery. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, opening and closing is executed as in the first embodiment. It is a high-probability mode that has a high probability that the hold information acquired is jackpot information after a game is played for a predetermined number of times after the mode ends. It is good also as a structure which is a low probability mode with a low probability that information is jackpot information.

  Further, a plurality of types of jackpots with different predetermined game times may be set. In this case, it is good also as a structure which varies a round production according to predetermined game times. Specifically, a normal round effect may be executed when a predetermined game number is equal to or less than a predetermined specific game time, and a special round effect may be executed when the predetermined game time is greater than the specific game time. As a result, a special round effect is performed when the degree of expectation that the hold information is relatively big hit information is high, and the normal round effect is executed when the expectation that the hold information is relatively big hit information is relatively low. The effect of the form can be produced.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the high probability mode is performed from the end of the opening / closing execution mode until the predetermined number of games are played, and the low probability mode is performed after the predetermined number of games are performed, the predetermined game times are reduced. You may set more than the holding | maintenance upper limit expected to be acquired in frequency support mode. In this case, the jackpot information is included in the acquired hold information in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the high frequency support mode and in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode in the situation of the low frequency support mode. The difference in expectations included is greater.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the aspect of determining the round effect and the aspect of the hold notice effect are different from those of the sixth embodiment. The different points will be described below.

  In the present embodiment, the content of the round effect is determined according to the number of holding information (holding number), not the presence / absence of the high-frequency support flag in the situation of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Specifically, a round effect determination process is executed instead of the processes of steps S3106 to S3108 in the gaming state transition process (FIG. 46) in the sixth embodiment. The round effect determination process will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, in step S3401, the total number of hold information (total number of holds) stored in each hold area Ra and Rb is grasped. Specifically, the value stored in the reserved number storage area CR is acquired. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S3402, and it is determined whether or not the total number of holds is zero.

  When the total number of holds is 0, it means that there is no hold information currently stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. In this case, the process proceeds to step S3403, a process of selecting a normal round effect is executed, and the round effect determining process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the total number of holds is not 0, it means that at least 1 hold information is stored in each hold area Ra, Rb. In this case, in steps S3404 to S3406, processing for selecting a special round effect according to the number of holds is executed.

  Specifically, in the present embodiment, as the special round effect, a first special round effect that performs the first reserved notice effect and a second special round effect that performs the second reserved notice effect are set. . The first hold notice effect corresponds to the hold notice effect in the sixth embodiment, and is a hold notice effect in which one round is associated with one piece of hold information. In contrast, the second hold notice effect is a hold notice effect in which a plurality of rounds (specifically, two rounds) are associated with one piece of hold information.

  The second hold notice effect will be described in detail. In the second hold notice effect, with respect to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination in the n (n: natural number of 1 to 4) variation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The 2n-1 round and the 2n round are associated with each other. For example, the first round and the second round are associated with the hold information that is the target of the determination of success / failure in the first variation start process. The production period of the second hold notice effect is set so that the second hold notice effect is performed over two rounds.

  According to such a configuration, in the n-th change start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, when the hold information that is the object of the determination is corresponding to the jackpot information, the 2nd-1 round and the 2n round are crossed. 2 A special effect as a reserved notice effect is executed. On the other hand, in the n-th fluctuation start process after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination does not correspond to the jackpot information, the second hold notice effect straddling the 2n-1 round and the 2n round The off-direction production is executed.

  In order to distinguish between the special effect and the off effect as the first hold notice effect, and the special effect and the off effect as the second hold notice effect, in the following description, the special effect as the first hold notice effect and Outage effects (special effects and outlier effects executed in the first special round effect) are referred to as first special effects and first off effects, and special effects and outlier effects (second special round effects as second hold notice effects). The special effect and the off-effect produced in step 2 are referred to as the second special effect and the second off-effect.

  In the present embodiment, one hold notice effect is selected from the two hold notice effects according to the number of holds determined in step S3401.

  Specifically, in step S3404, it is determined whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds (specifically 4). If the total number of reservations is greater than 4, specifically, if the total number of reservations is 5 to 8, the process proceeds to step S3405, the first special round effect is selected, and the round effect determination process ends. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the first special round effect is set.

  On the other hand, if the total number of holds is 1 to 4, the second special round effect is selected in step S3406, and the round effect determining process is terminated. Specifically, specific information for specifying execution of the second special round effect is set.

  By executing the above processing, the current round effect is determined, and specific information for specifying the determined round effect is transmitted to the display control device 212. Thereby, it is possible to specify which round effect is to be performed in the display control device 212, and the process corresponding to the specified round effect is executed in the round display start process.

  Here, as described in the sixth embodiment, since the number of holds in the situation of the low frequency support mode is substantially four, the case where the number of holds is 1 to 4 is the low frequency support mode. In the situation where at least one hold information is stored, it can be said that the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, or the high-frequency support mode and the number of holds when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 4. . Further, the case where the number of holds is 5 to 8 is based on the assumption that the high frequency support mode is set.

  Note that the support mode in the open / close execution mode is the low frequency support mode, and the upper limit number of holds expected in the low frequency support mode is 4. For this reason, when the number of suspensions is 4 or less at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the number of suspensions is rarely 5 or more during the opening / closing execution mode. For this reason, the number of holds becomes 5 or more during the opening / closing execution mode, and it is difficult for the hold information that is not the subject of the hold notice effect to occur.

  Next, in each special round effect, the correspondence between the round in which the hold notice effect is performed and the order in which the determination is made will be described. The association is performed in a process executed when a match information command is received in the match information reception process in the display control device 212. Specifically, when a match information command is received, the game number of the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is specified based on the information included in the match information command. Then, the round effect in the current opening / closing execution mode is specified.

  When the round effect in the current opening / closing execution mode is the first special round effect, a storage process of round information in which one hold information is associated with one round is executed. Specifically, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is executed in the m-th (m: 1 to 8) variation start process, the round information corresponding to the m-th round is stored in the round information storage area. Remember me.

  On the other hand, when the round effect is the second special round effect, a process of storing round information in which two pieces of hold information are associated with one round is executed. Specifically, if the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is executed in the n-th change start process, the round information corresponding to the 2n-1 round (odd round) is stored in the round information storage area. Remember me. In this case, the hold information related to the fifth and subsequent change start processes is not subject to the second hold notice effect.

  Here, in the second special round effect, since the hold information related to the change starting process after the fifth time after the opening / closing execution mode ends is not the target of the hold notice effect, when the total number of holds is 5 or more, There is a possibility that the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is generated.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the total number of holds is 5 to 8, all the hold information stored in the hold areas Ra and Rb is the target of the hold notice effect. While the special round effect is selected, when the total number of holds is 1 to 4, since the four hold information selects the second special round effect that is the target of the hold notice effect, it is not the target of the hold notice effect. Pending information is unlikely to occur. In other words, whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds is determined by determining whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the number of holds that are the target of the second hold notice effect in the second special round effect. It can also be said that the second special round effect is performed when the number is the same as or less than the number of holds that is the target of the second hold notice effect. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect to occur.

<Round display start processing>
The round display start process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current round effect is a normal round effect. If it is a normal round effect, a normal round effect process for performing a normal round effect is executed in step S3502, and the round display start process is terminated. The normal round effect processing is the same as the processing in steps S3302 to S3305 in the round display start processing (FIG. 48) of the sixth embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the current round effect is not a normal round effect, the process advances to step S3503 to determine whether the current round effect is a first special round effect.

  If it is the first special round effect, the processing of step S3504 to step S3508 is executed. Since this process is the same as the process of steps S3306 to S3310 in the round display start process (FIG. 48) of the sixth embodiment, a description thereof will be omitted.

  If it is not the first special round effect, it means that the current round effect is the first special round effect. In this case, it is determined in step S3509 whether an open command has been received.

  If the release command has not been received, the round display start process is terminated as it is, while if the release command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3510, during the second holding notice effect (during the second special effect or the second special effect). It is determined whether or not 2)

  As described above, the release command reception timing corresponds to the start timing of each round. The second hold notice effect (second special effect and second off effect) is set to be performed over two rounds. For this reason, depending on the reception timing of the release command, the second hold notice effect may be in progress. Specifically, at the start timing of the even-numbered rounds (the second, fourth, sixth, and eighth rounds) of the first to eighth rounds, the second hold notice effect is being performed.

  If it is not during the second hold notice effect, a round information grasping process is executed in step S3511. Specifically, it is ascertained whether the round information is stored, and if the round information is stored, the number of rounds in which the second special effect as the hold notice effect is executed is determined. To do.

  Thereafter, in step S3512, it is determined whether or not the current round is a round corresponding to the round information based on the grasping result grasped in step S3511.

  When affirmative determination is made in step S3512, a data table corresponding to the second special effect is set in step S3513, and this round display start process is terminated. On the other hand, when negative determination is made in step S3512, the second deviation is detected in step S3514. The data table corresponding to the performance is set and the round display start process is ended.

  Here, the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect (second special effect and second off effect) is set such that the second hold notice effect is executed over two rounds. Specifically, a movie executed in the first round and a movie executed in the next round are set in the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect. The movie executed in the first round is set to be common to both the second special effect and the second off effect. On the other hand, the movie executed in the next round is set so that the content differs between the second special effect and the second off-effect.

  In steps S3513 and S3514, processing for setting a corresponding data table is executed, and processing for starting playback of a movie corresponding to the first round is executed.

  If it is determined that the second hold notice effect is being performed, the second hold notice effect update process is executed in step S3515. Specifically, processing for starting playback of a movie corresponding to the next round is executed in the data table corresponding to the second pending notice effect. Then, the round display start process is terminated.

<Direction aspect of second hold notice effect>
Next, the second reservation notice effect will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the second hold notice effect. FIG. 54 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G at the start timing of the first round, and FIG. 54 (b). ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G in the first round, and FIG. 54 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display mode of the display screen G in the second round in the second off stage effect. FIG. 54D is an explanatory diagram for explaining a display mode of the display screen G in the second round in the second special effect. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that both the second special effect and the second off effect are performed in the first round and the second round.

  First, when the first round (odd round) is started, a girl character with a cane is displayed in the center of the display screen G as a movie corresponding to the first round, as shown in FIG. The In the upper left part of the display screen G, the current round information (1 round) and the fact that the total number of rounds is 8 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), a state is displayed in which the girl character casts a spell while holding the wand over the sky, and a state in which the girl character is surrounded by bright light along with the spell is displayed. The dazzling light wraps not only the girl character but also the entire display screen G, and the first round ends. Then, during the interval between the first round and the second round, the state in which the bright light wraps the entire display screen G is maintained. The display mode so far is common to the second special effect and the second off effect.

  When the second round (even-numbered round) is started, the display of the movie corresponding to the next round is started. Specifically, in the second off stage effect, after the dazzling light is settled, as shown in FIG. 54 (c-1), a girl character that fails to transform and falls to the floor is displayed. In this case, the current round information displayed in the upper left part of the display screen G has been updated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (c-2), a character indicating that it is off is displayed, and the second off effect is finished.

  In such a configuration, the period from the start of the second round to the display of the girl character that fails to transform and falls to the floor is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. In other words, the result notification required period from the start timing of the second off effect to the timing at which it is possible to specify that it is out is greater than the unit period of one round period and one interval period, and It is set smaller than the period obtained by doubling the unit period. Thus, it is notified that the result of the hold notice is out of sync between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  On the other hand, in the second special effect, after the dazzling light is settled, as shown in FIG. 54 (d-1), the girl character that has been successfully transformed is displayed on the entire display screen G. In this case, the current round information displayed in the upper left part of the display screen G has been updated. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 54 (d-2), a character indicating that the next jackpot has been confirmed is displayed, and the second special effect is ended.

  In such a configuration, the period from the start of the second round to the display of the girl character that has been successfully transformed is set to be shorter than the combined period of the round period and the interval period. That is, the result notification required period from the start timing of the second special effect to the timing at which it is possible to specify that it is a big hit is set to be larger than the unit period and smaller than the period obtained by doubling the unit period. ing. Thereby, it is notified that the result of the hold notice is a big hit between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  That is, the movie executed in the first round set in the data table corresponding to the second hold notice effect and the movie executed in the next round are continuous so that the story progresses. . In addition, it can be said that the second hold notice effect is an effect that is set so that the subsequent display mode differs according to the branch of transformation.

<State of the second special round production>
Next, the state of the second special round effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode will be described using the timing chart of FIG. In FIG. 55, for convenience of explanation, the opening period, the ending period, and the interval period (closed period) between the rounds in the opening / closing execution mode are omitted. It is assumed that the number of hold information (holding number) stored in each holding area Ra, Rb at the timing of t1 is 3, and of the three holding information, after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is assumed that the hold information related to the second fluctuation start process corresponds to jackpot information, and the other hold information does not correspond to jackpot information.

  At the timing of t1, the game round corresponding to the big win is completed, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode. In this case, as already described, since the number of holds is 3, the second special round effect is selected.

  Here, since the hold information related to the first fluctuation start process after the end of the open / close mode does not correspond to the jackpot information, the second off effect is executed as the second hold notice effect in the first and second rounds. . In this case, a notification that there is a deviation is made between the start timing of the second round and the start timing of the third round.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, which is the start timing of the third round, the second special effect is executed as the second hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the second change start process after the end of the open / close mode. In this case, a notification of a big hit is made between the start timing of the fourth round and the start timing of the fifth round.

  Then, at the timing t3 which is the start timing of the fifth round, the second off-stage effect is executed as the second hold notice effect corresponding to the hold information related to the third variation start process after the opening / closing mode ends.

  Subsequently, at the timing t4 which is the start timing of the seventh round, there is no holding information corresponding to the round. In this case, the second off effect is executed. Thereafter, the opening / closing execution mode ends.

  When the fourth hold information is acquired from the timing t1 to the timing t4, the second hold notice effect (second special effect or second) related to the fourth hold information at the timing t4. Off-direction production) is started.

  That is, when the number of holds stored at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 3, the number of holds can be increased. In this case, if the timing at which the hold information is acquired is a timing before the start timing of the round corresponding to the newly acquired hold information, the second hold notice effect related to the newly acquired hold information. Is to be executed.

  After that, at the timing of t6 when the second game round is completed, the mode is again shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  As a hold notice effect, each hold information and each round correspond to each other in a one-on-one correspondence, and a second hold notice effect that two rounds correspond to one hold information is provided. One of the effects is selected according to the number. Specifically, when the total number of holds when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 1 to 4, the second special round effect for executing the second hold notice effect is selected, and the total number of holds is 5 to 8 In some cases, the first special round effect for executing the first hold notice effect is selected. As a result, it is possible to suppress repeated meaningless off-stage effects in situations where the total number of holds is relatively small, and in the situation where the total number of holds is relatively high, each hold information is subject to a hold notice effect. It can be. Therefore, the hold notice effect can be suitably performed.

  In other words, if the first hold notice effect is selected in a situation where the total number of holds is small, a substantially meaningless effect (an off effect corresponding to the absence of hold information) is repeatedly executed, and substantially no effect. There may be a situation where the meaningful performance period becomes long. On the other hand, if the second hold notice effect is selected in a situation where the total number of holds is large, the hold notice effect (special effect or off effect) for all hold information cannot be performed during the opening / closing execution mode, and the hold The start timing of the notice effect may be later than the fluctuation start process, and the original effect of the hold notice effect may not be ensured. However, if the number of the hold information that is the target of the hold notice effect is limited, the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect may be generated, and a situation in which the hold notice effect cannot be suitably performed may occur.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, in a situation where the total number of holds is equal to or less than the specific number of holds (specifically 4), the second hold notice effect is selected, and the total number of holds is more than the specific number of holds In many situations, the occurrence of the above situation can be suppressed by selecting the first hold notice effect.

  In particular, there may be a case where the total number of reservations is small even in the high frequency support mode. For this reason, if the distribution is performed in the support mode, there may be a case where the first special round effect is executed in spite of the situation where the total number of reservations is small. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the above-described inconvenience can be avoided because it is configured to determine the mode of the hold notice effect by the total number of holds. That is, it is possible to distribute the round effects more appropriately in the configuration in which the round effect is determined based on the total number of reservations rather than in the support mode, compared to the configuration in which the round effect is allocated in the support mode.

  Further, as the specific number of holds, a value obtained by dividing the number of holds that can be the target of the hold notice effect in the second hold notice effect, specifically, the total number of rounds (8) divided by the number of rounds (2) required for the second hold notice effect. It was set. Thereby, at least in the situation of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the number of holds that is not the target of the hold notice effect does not occur. Therefore, the hold notice effect can be suitably performed.

  Further, when the total number of holds is 0, the normal round effect is selected. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that a meaningless effect is performed by executing the hold notice effect even though there is no hold information.

  In the present embodiment, the second hold notice effect is configured to be performed over two rounds, but is not limited thereto, and may be configured to be performed over, for example, three rounds, four rounds,. In this case, the specific number of holds may be changed in accordance with the number of pieces of hold information that can be set as the target of the hold notice effect. Specifically, when executing a hold notice effect in which four rounds are associated with one hold information, 2 may be set as the specific hold number. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the hold information that is not the target of the hold notice effect is generated.

  In the present embodiment, the specific number of reservations is set to 4, but is not limited to this, and may be 2 or 3. In short, the specific number of holds only needs to be equal to or smaller than 4, which is the number of hold information that can be the target of hold notice in the second hold notice effect.

  Although the production start timings of both the second special production and the second off production are set to be the same as the round start timing, the production start timing is not limited to this, and may be configured to start from the midway of the round. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which production start timing differs with a 2nd special production and a 2nd off production.

  Further, the support mode in the opening / closing execution mode may be set to the high frequency support mode. In this case, during the open / close execution mode, the number of holds can shift from 4 or less to 5 or more. In such a configuration, the round effect may be shifted from the first special round effect to the second special round effect in accordance with the transition, and thereby there is no hold information that is not a target of the hold notice effect. Can do.

  Moreover, it is good also as a structure which performs a normal round effect when the total number of pending | holdings is below a specific number of pending | holdings, ie, when the total number of pending | holdings is 0-4. In this case, since the expected number of holds in the low frequency support mode is 4, the determination process for determining whether or not the total number of holds is larger than the specific number of holds is substantially the support mode in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode. Can be said to determine whether or not is in the low frequency support mode. In addition, as described in the sixth embodiment, the normal round effect production period is set longer than the period for performing the hold notice effect related to the hold information for the specific number of reservations, so that the normal round effect is free. The degree can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 81 determines the round effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the display control device 212 may determine the round effect. In this case, the total number of holds at the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is transmitted to the display control device 212, and processing for determining a round effect based on the transmitted total number of holds is executed.

  Further, the first special round effect and the second special round effect may be combined. For example, when the total number of suspensions in the case of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode is 6, the first special round effect is provided for the suspension information related to the first to fourth variation start processing after the opening / closing execution mode ends in the first to fourth rounds. It is good also as a structure which performs a 2nd special round effect about the pending | holding information which concerns on the 5th-6th change start process in the 5-8 round after completion | finish of opening / closing execution mode. As a result, it is possible to perform a meaningful hold notice effect in all rounds.

  Moreover, you may apply combining the modification shown in 6th Embodiment timely.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually or in combination to the configurations of the above embodiments.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the first hold notice confirmation process and the second hold notice confirmation process are set, and the hold notice is executed twice in one opening / closing execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in addition to the confirmation process for the first and second hold notices, the confirmation process for the third to eighth hold notices may be set. That is, the number of times that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored in one opening / closing execution mode may be three or more. For example, by setting the same number of hold notice confirmation processes as “8”, which is the number of hold information that can be stored, even if all of the stored hold information corresponds to jackpot information, A hold notice can be executed for hold information corresponding to jackpot information.

  Further, for example, in the opening / closing execution mode, the confirmation process for holding notice described in the third embodiment may be repeatedly executed. Even in this case, the special effect is executed a maximum of 8 times in one opening / closing execution mode.

  (2) Although the success / failure determination process in the change start process is performed in the order in which the hold information is stored, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. Hold information that is preferentially set as a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process may be set.

  For example, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball out of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 may be preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. In this case, in the high frequency support mode, the frequency with which the game ball wins the lower operation port 34 is increased, and therefore the hold information stored based on the winning of the lower operation port 34 is preferentially determined in the variation start process. A configuration that is a target of the determination process may be used.

  As described above, when the hold information is stored, and the operation port that is the determination result in the change start process is preferentially set, the information is stored based on the winning of the priority operation port. The reserved hold information may be a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. This is because, if a game ball wins a prize on the priority side after executing a hold notice for the hold information based on the winning to the non-priority side action opening, it corresponds to the execution timing of the hold notice and the jackpot information This is because the case where the hold information is different from the timing of the game times that are the targets of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process may occur.

  In addition, in the configuration in which the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball among the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process, Regardless of whether or not the hold information is acquired based on the winning in the mouth, it may be a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. In this configuration, the determination processing for success / failure in the confirmation process for reservation notice is sequentially executed on the stored reservation information. If the hold information corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed according to the stored hold information state (number), the hold notice is executed at a timing corresponding to the order of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. Good. In this configuration, with respect to the hold information whose priority is the non-priority side in the variation start process, even if the hold notice is executed, the hold information on the priority side is acquired after that Based on this, the timing that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process may be changed. For this reason, in this configuration, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing of winning the big win can be changed for the hold information on the non-priority side, or when the status of the stored hold information is supported It is preferable to notify the player that the timing of winning the jackpot is announced.

  In each of the above embodiments, when the special display is executed, the player is notified of which holding information the holding notice is executed for. For this reason, the hold information is newly acquired thereafter, and it is easy for the player to grasp at what timing the hold information for winning the jackpot is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process.

  (3) The timing at which the hold notice is executed may be changed.

  For example, an operation switch (operation means) operated by a player may be provided, and when the operation switch is operated, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a hold advance notice can be executed. In this configuration, the player can set a mode in which the hold notice can be executed at an arbitrary timing. For example, when this configuration is applied to the third embodiment, a special game number may be set when an operation switch is operated.

  In addition, for example, when a game ball wins in an operation port provided in the game area, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a holding notice can be executed. For example, the mode may be shifted to a mode in which a hold notice can be executed based on a game ball winning in the general winning opening 31.

  In addition, the hold notice is not executed in the game times in the low frequency support mode, and may be executed in the game times in the high frequency support mode.

  (4) The execution mode of the hold notice may be arbitrarily changed, and the hold notice may be executed by a device different from the symbol display device 41 or the special display device 48. For example, there may be a case where the hold notice is executed in the display mode of the display lamp unit 63.

  Further, the effect to be executed may be different between the hold notice based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 33 and the hold notice based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 34.

  Further, the execution effect may be different between the hold notice based on the first match information command and the hold notice based on the second match information command.

  (5) Reach display may not be generated in the game times based on the hold information that is identified as not corresponding to the jackpot information in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  For example, it is conceivable that a variable display time table is set for the case where the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is the target of the determination process in the change start process. In this case, the game times based on the hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot may be set as a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. This is because if the hold notice is not executed at a predetermined timing (for example, the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment), the hold information stored until the predetermined timing corresponds to the jackpot information. It will not be. In this case, the player understands that the jackpot is not won before the game result is displayed. For this reason, it is desirable to shorten the variable display time for game times based on the hold information that does not correspond to the jackpot information and is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice.

  (6) In the first embodiment, when it is specified that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information is stored in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the hold notice is always executed. However, the hold notice need not always be executed, and for example, the hold notice may be executed when a lottery for holding notice is won.

  (7) The timing at which the hold information is acquired may be arbitrarily changed. For example, the hold information is acquired when the game ball passes through a predetermined area or when the game ball contacts a predetermined location. May be.

  (8) In the confirmation process for each holding notice in the first embodiment, the validity determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed for a maximum of five pieces of holding information. The number of information may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in each confirmation process for the hold notice, the determination process of whether or not the confirmation process for the hold notice is performed may be executed for all of the stored hold information.

  (9) The hold information associated with the timing when the hold notice is executed may be changed. For example, a plurality of hold information may correspond to one round in the opening / closing execution mode. For example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if any of the holding information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process in the first to third game times corresponds to the big win, the opening / closing execution mode The hold notice may be executed in the first round. In addition, when a plurality of hold information is associated with one round, the number of hold information corresponding to each round among the set rounds may be the same or different. It may be. Similarly, when the advance notice is executed at a game time (special game time), if the game time is divided into a plurality of sections (periods), the hold information corresponding to the section is singular. There may be more than one. Furthermore, the number of hold information corresponding to each section may be different.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a plurality of sections in which a hold notice can be executed are set, and a plurality of pieces of hold information are associated with the one section, one game ball of the upper working port 33 and the lower working port 34 is further provided. It is conceivable that the hold information acquired on the basis of the winnings is a target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process. In this case, with respect to the hold information whose priority is the non-priority side in the fluctuation start process, on the basis of the fact that the priority side hold information is acquired thereafter, the object of the determination process in the fluctuation start process The timing of becoming may change. For this reason, in this configuration, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing of winning the big win can be changed for the hold information on the non-priority side, or when the status of the stored hold information is supported It is preferable to notify the player that the timing of winning the jackpot is announced.

  In addition, for example, the timing at which the hold notice is executed may be set so that the winning operation port can be distinguished. For example, the odd round in the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the hold information based on the winning to the upper operation port 33 The even-numbered round in the opening / closing execution mode may correspond to the hold information based on the winning to the lower operation port 34. In this case, by grasping the timing at which the hold notice is executed, the hold information is based on the winning of the game ball to any of the operation ports, and what is obtained among the hold information corresponding to the operation ports However, it is possible for the player to grasp whether or not a big hit is won when it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. In this case, it is assumed that the hold information acquired based on the winning of one game ball out of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is a configuration that is preferentially subjected to the success / failure determination process in the variation start process. However, even if the priority side hold information is acquired after the hold notice is executed, there is no problem.

  (10) You may change the timing at which the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed. For example, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice may be executed at the timing when the game ball wins the operation opening. For example, in the first embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the pending notice is performed in a period in which the big winning opening 32a is closed until the end of one round and the start of the next round. It is possible to execute the determination processing for the hold notice in the confirmation process for the hold notice for the hold information for which the hold notice is executed in the next round.

  (11) Which hold information corresponds to the hold information in the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment, and in the state of the symbol row that is stopped in the third embodiment However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. Depending on the opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment and the time from when the special game times in the third embodiment are started until the holding notice is executed, the holding notice corresponds to any holding information. The player may be made aware of whether or not.

  (12) Although the light emission mode in the special display device 48 is not intended to notify which hold information it is, the hold notice corresponds to any hold information depending on the light emission mode in the special display device 48. You may make it alert | report whether it is.

  (13) Number of games (5 game times) in which the high probability mode is set after the opening / closing execution mode is ended, number of games (8 game times) corresponding to the maximum number of hold information that can be stored, and opening / closing execution mode The relationship with the number of rounds may be arbitrarily changed.

  For example, a configuration is conceivable in which the number of games in which the high probability mode is set is smaller than the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice. In this configuration, if it is determined whether or not the number of games corresponding to the high probability mode or the number of games corresponding to the low probability mode is determined in the success / failure determination processing in the confirmation processing for holding notice. Good. Specifically, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the high probability mode is set up to the third game time, and the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice is changed to the success / failure determination process in the change start process by the fifth game time. What is executed with respect to the target hold information can be considered. In this case, in the determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode is executed for those corresponding to the third game round, and corresponding to the 4th and 5th game rounds. For the above, it is sufficient to execute the determination processing corresponding to the low probability mode.

  In addition, in the above configuration, when the number of hold information that is the target of the determination process for the hold notice is larger than the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the high probability mode As for one hold information corresponding to one round, a plurality of hold information corresponds to one round for the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the low probability mode. It is good to. In the high probability mode, it is assumed that the probability of winning a big hit is high and the player's attention to the game is high. In this configuration, with regard to the special notification corresponding to the period when the player's attention level is high, it is possible to make the player know in detail which special information the special notification corresponds to. As a result, the player's attention level regarding whether or not the special notification is executed, and if the special notification is executed, the player's attention level regarding which special information the special notification corresponds to, respectively. Can be increased.

  In addition, for example, a configuration in which the number of rounds in the opening / closing execution mode is smaller than the number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the first hold notice confirmation process is conceivable. In this configuration, a plurality of pieces of hold information may correspond to one round in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In addition, the timing at which the hold notice is executed is different from that in each of the above-described embodiments, and a configuration is considered in which the hold information is reduced in the change start process in a predetermined state where the hold notice can be executed, and the hold information is reduced. It is done. In this configuration, there may be a configuration in which the number of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is larger than the maximum number of hold information that can be stored. In this case, the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice may be executed for a predetermined number of pieces of hold information.

  (14) In the first embodiment, the holding notice is executed when the special winning opening 32a is open in the opening / closing execution mode. However, the timing for executing the holding notice can be arbitrarily changed. . That is, in a configuration in which a predetermined section that is divided at a predetermined timing is set, when a hold notice is executed in the preceding section and the rear section, the hold information corresponding to the hold notice is displayed. It only has to be different.

  For example, the advance notice may be executed when the special winning opening 32a is closed. In this case, a hold notice is executed between rounds in the opening / closing execution mode. Furthermore, in this configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one of the game balls of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. You may apply. In this case, when the hold information is newly stored, the timing for winning the jackpot for the non-priority hold information can be changed, or the jackpot winning in the case of corresponding to the state of the stored hold information. It is preferable to notify the player that the timing is being notified.

  Further, for example, the hold notice may be executed in each of the case where the special winning opening 32a is closed and the case where the special winning opening 32a is open. Furthermore, in this configuration, the hold information acquired based on the winning of one of the game balls of the upper operation port 33 and the lower operation port 34 is preferentially subjected to the determination process in the variation start process. You may apply. In this case, the hold notice executed in the closed state of the big prize opening 32a corresponds to one operation opening, and the hold notice executed in the open state of the big prize opening 32a corresponds to the other operation opening. It is good to do so. In this case, even if the hold information on the priority side is acquired after the hold notice is executed, the timing at which the hold notice is executed and the timing at which the hold information is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process are changed. Can be prevented.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the success / failure determination process in the second hold notice confirmation process is determined to be the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process. By the way, although the target of the determination process in the variation start process up to the fifth game is targeted, it is not limited to such a configuration. With respect to the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the change start process, as seen from the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot information in the confirmation process for the first hold notice, the second hold notice What is necessary is just to perform the validity determination process in a confirmation process.

  For example, when the confirmation process for the second hold notice confirms that the success / failure determination process is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process, the variation starts by the third game. It is also possible to target an object that is a target of the determination process.

  Further, for example, the third to fifth points in view of what is determined as the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information in the first hold notice confirmation process in the second hold notice confirmation process. In addition, an object that is a target of the success / failure determination process in the variation start process may be used.

  (16) In the second embodiment, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, depending on whether one of the high probability match information and the low probability match information is set in the first hold notice confirmation process, Although it is determined whether to execute the determination processing corresponding to either the high probability mode or the low probability mode, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, whether or not the hold information corresponding to the jackpot information common to each mode which is a jackpot winning is stored regardless of whether the mode is a high probability mode or a low probability mode. You may make it determine.

  (17) In the third embodiment, the special game times are set when the lottery is won, but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, special game times may be set at a predetermined cycle.

  In addition, when the holding information corresponding to the big win is not stored, the special game times may not be made. In this configuration, the special game times can be made based on the fact that the hold information corresponding to the big win is stored.

  (18) Although the upper working port 33 as the first starting ball entering part and the lower working port 34 as the second starting ball entering part are arranged in parallel vertically, the present invention is not limited to this. The positional relationship between the two may be reversed, and the two may be separated from each other on the left and right.

  In addition, when the firing handle 54 is operated in the same manner (the same amount of rotation) for the first start ball entrance portion and the second start ball entrance portion, each of the first start ball entrance portion and the second start ball entrance portion Although the first start ball entering part and the second start ball entering part are arranged side by side so that the game ball can win a prize, it is not limited to this, and even if the firing handle 54 is operated in the same manner, The positional relationship between the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion may be set so that it is difficult for the game balls to win in each of the first start ball entering portion and the second start ball entering portion. In this case, a first launch operation aimed at winning a game ball to the first start pitching portion and a second launch operation aiming at winning a game ball to the second start pitching portion are individually set, For the player, the launch handle 54 can be operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the first starting pitching portion, and the launch handle 54 can be operated with the aim of winning the game ball in the second starting pitching portion. can do.

  Moreover, the number of starting ball entering parts is not limited to two, and may be three or more, for example.

  (19) The number of reservations is not limited to the configuration in which the number of first result display area reservation areas Ra is four and the number of second result display area reservation areas Rb is four, but one to three. Or it may be 5 or more each, and it is good also as a structure from which both hold numbers differ.

  Further, the second result display area reservation area Rb may not be provided. In this case, the hold information is stored in the first result display holding area Ra regardless of which of the operation holes 33 and 34 wins the game ball. In this case, one of the operation ports 33 and 34 may not be provided.

  (20) The configuration of giving a game ball to the winning of a game ball to the variable winning device 32 or the like is not limited to the configuration of paying out the game ball directly. In the configuration having a function of storing virtual game media, It is good also as a structure which provides the said virtual game medium.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 41 may be omitted, and a lottery result such as a success / failure lottery may be taught by a movable decorative member.

  (21) A different arrangement may be used for the big hit random number counter and the big hit type counter for the hold information related to winning in the upper working port 33 and the holding information related to winning in the lower working port 34.

  (22) It goes without saying that the number of jackpot numerical information set for the high probability mode may be other than ten, and the number of jackpot numerical information set for the low probability mode is the jackpot set for the high probability mode. It goes without saying that the number can be arbitrarily changed as long as it is smaller than the number of numerical information.

  (23) A game result different from the jackpot result may be set. For example, although a transition is made to the opening / closing execution mode, a special losing result is set in which the lottery mode and support mode state before the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is maintained after the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (after completion). It may be. As an aspect of the opening / closing execution mode based on this special losing result, it is conceivable that the opening / closing execution mode is ended when the special winning opening 32a is opened a predetermined number of times or when a predetermined number of game balls are won in the special winning opening 32a. . In this configuration, the hold notice may be executed in the opening / closing execution mode based on the special loss result.

  (24) The main control device 81 transmits the information acquired from the jackpot random number counter C1 as it is to a sub-side control device such as the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212, and the sub-side control device performs confirmation processing for holding advance notice. It is good also as a structure which performs.

  (25) In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is included in the jackpot value information in the high probability mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot value information in the low probability mode is It is good also as a structure which is not contained in the jackpot numerical value information in high probability mode.

  (26) It is possible to adopt a configuration in which only a single success / failure lottery mode is set, and a plurality of types of jackpot value information are set for the success / failure lottery mode, instead of a plurality of stages of the success / failure lottery mode. .

  (27) Reservation information is not acquired based on a game ball flowing down the game area entering a predetermined entry part, but is retained based on an operation part that is manually operated by a player. The information may be acquired.

  (28) In each of the above-described embodiments, one game turn in the main display unit 43 is started based on whether or not the main controller 81 determines whether or not, but the present invention is not limited to this. On the other hand, when the condition for determining whether or not the main control device 81 is satisfied is satisfied, the game times are started at a timing before the timing when the determination is actually made, and the determination is made after that. The subsequent variation display pattern, variation display time, and stop result in the game time may be determined. In this case, the main control device 81 first transmits a change command when the game turn start timing is reached, and then determines whether or not the game is correct, determines the change display time, and determines the type. The type command may be transmitted, and the transmission timing of the variable time command and the type command may be shifted. However, the timing at which the variation time command and the type command are transmitted needs to be the timing until the symbol variation display is switched from the high-speed variation to the low-speed variation in the symbol display device 41.

  (29) When the hold notice is executed in the opening / closing execution mode, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result in a predetermined round among the first to fifth rounds. May be notified. In this case, it is preferable that the round in which the notification is performed is a round in which the hold notice is not executed.

  Further, in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it may be notified in the fifth round that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result. In this case, in the first to fourth rounds, the player cannot grasp whether the result is the 6R probability variation jackpot result or the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and the player is expected to be in the opening / closing execution mode based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result. To play games. In this configuration, when notifying that the opening / closing execution mode is based on the 16R probability variation jackpot result in the sixth round, it is only necessary not to execute the hold notice.

  (30) When one open / close execution mode ends and the next open / close execution mode is entered, the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the confirmation process for hold notice in the one open / close execution mode Thus, it is possible that the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice is not executed in the next opening / closing execution mode. In this case, the history may be stored when it is a target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the hold notice. In this configuration, it is possible to prevent execution of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice multiple times for one piece of holding information. As a result, it is possible to prevent an excessive processing load from being applied in executing the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice.

  (31) You may change the timing at which the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is executed. For example, when the hold information is stored, when the game state is the normal state (when it is not a special game time or when it is not in the opening / closing execution mode), the determination process of the confirmation process for the hold notice is executed. Good.

  For example, in the case of special game times or the opening / closing execution mode, a command reflecting the result of the determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is output from the main controller 81 to the sound lamp controller 82. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the result of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for holding notice is output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82, the result of the determination process is included in the change start command and the type command. You may be made to do. That is, the command may be output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 in a state where the result of the success / failure determination processing in the confirmation processing for holding notice is included in any command. In this case, the number of commands output from the main control device 81 to the sound lamp control device 82 can be reduced.

  (32) In the first embodiment, the hold notice is executed when a predetermined time has elapsed after the round in which the hold notice is executed is determined. However, the present invention is limited to this configuration. Not. After the round in which the hold notice is executed is determined, the hold notice may be executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied in the round.

  For example, the hold notice may be executed when a predetermined number of game balls have won the big prize opening 32a in the round in which the hold notice is executed. Here, when 10 game balls win the big winning opening 32a, the round is ended. For this reason, a number smaller than 10 may be set as the predetermined number. In this configuration, the timing for executing the hold notice is determined not by the passage of time but by the number of game balls won in the big winning opening 32a. This makes it possible to execute a hold notice before the end of one round.

  (33) For the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the second hold notice confirmation process in the first embodiment, the open / close execution mode in that case and the next open / close execution mode However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration.

  For example, when the hold notice based on the hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result is executed in the confirmation process for the second hold notice, the hold notice based on the hold information in the next opening / closing execution mode. May not be executed.

  Further, for example, when a hold notice based on hold information identified as corresponding to the jackpot result in the confirmation process for the second hold notice is being executed, based on the hold information in the next opening / closing execution mode When the hold notice is executed, one of the special light emission process and the special display process may not be executed.

  (34) In the first embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the target of the determination process in the variation start process is the sixth to eighth game times. The timing to execute the hold notice when it is determined that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is specified may be changed.

  For example, when the hold notice is executed in the sixth round, the timing at which the hold notice is executed in the first round may be different depending on the hold information corresponding to any of the sixth game to the eighth game. Good. For example, the game corresponding to the sixth game round when 2 seconds have passed since the start of the sixth round is the one corresponding to the seventh game round when 4 seconds have passed, and the game corresponding to the seventh game round is 8 games when 6 seconds have passed. The one corresponding to the second time may be executed.

  For example, after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the hold information that is the target of the determination process in the variation start process corresponds to the jackpot result at the 7th game or the 8th game, the hold corresponding to the hold information The advance notice may be executed when the ending display in the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  (35) In the second embodiment described above, the upper limit number of the hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the hold notice confirmation process is the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result in the first hold notice confirmation process. Regardless of whether or not it is specified that is stored, it may be set in advance. For example, it is conceivable that the total number of pieces of hold information that is the target of the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice and the confirmation process for the second hold notice is “5”. In this case, when it is determined in the determination process of the first hold notice confirmation process that the hold information corresponding to the jackpot result is stored, the hold subject to the hold notice determination process for the hold notice There is no increase in information. Then, in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice executed after the specific, depending on the result of the success / failure judgment process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice (ordinary jackpot result or probable change jackpot result) Thus, whether or not the determination process corresponding to any of the high probability mode and the low probability mode is executed is different.

  (36) In each of the above embodiments, the display control device 212 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from the main control device 81. Instead, the main control device is used. The display control device 212 may be configured to control the sound lamp control device 82 based on the command output from 81. Further, instead of the configuration in which the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are separately provided, the control devices 82 and 212 may be provided as a single sub-side control device. The functions of the sound lamp control device 82 or the display control device 212 may be integrated into the main control device 81, and the functions of both the sound lamp control device 82 and the display control device 212 are integrated into the main control device 81. It is good also as a structure.

  (37) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines that release a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  (38) Non-ballistic gaming machines, for example, equipped with a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, start rotation of the reels by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has elapsed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

  In the gaming machine configured as described above, when information for determining a game result is acquired in advance and a game result based on the information is notified in advance, the timing of the notification and a game based on the information What is necessary is just to match | combine with the timing which becomes a result. In this configuration, the player can understand that the timing at which the game result is obtained grasps the timing at which the notification is executed.

  Further, when a plurality of pieces of information for determining a game result are stored, when a game result based on one information is specified, a subsequent game result is specified based on the specified result. It is advisable to make the processing different. For example, a bonus game that is advantageous to the player is set, and after the bonus game ends, the specific gaming state in which the probability of winning a specific role is changed, the winning role, and the winning of the role A gaming machine in which a specific gaming state is taught that teaches a method for establishing a game. In this case, when it is specified that the bonus game is won before the game result corresponding to the occurrence of the bonus game is determined, the game result indicating whether or not the specific game state occurs after the bonus game is ended. Should be specified.

<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

Feature A1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing confirmation processing for the first and second hold notices by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. The special notification control means to be executed by the special display device 48) (round display start processing and special effect during round display processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the first embodiment, second implementation) A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the form of the above, and the mid-change process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
With
When the special notification control unit performs the special notification about the predetermined special information, the special notification control unit executes the special notification according to a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of application by the application determination unit. A gaming machine characterized by having different timings.

  According to the feature A1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  The timing at which the special notification is executed is different depending on the timing at which the special information that is specified by the first specifying means is the target of the determination of grant. Thereby, by grasping the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to grasp which special information for the special information is notified by which specific information. As a result, when the special notification is executed, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which special information the special notification is for.

  In addition, by varying the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to lengthen the period during which the player pays attention to whether or not the special notification is executed. That is, the period during which the player's attention to the game is increased can be lengthened. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be increased.

Feature A2. When the plurality of special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, the grant determination unit performs grant determination in a predetermined order with respect to the plurality of special information.
The special notification control unit causes the special notification to be executed at a timing in which the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying unit is associated with the order that is determined by the determination unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, which is characterized in that

  According to the feature A2, the order in which the special information that is the specific target is the target of the determination to be given is associated with the timing at which the special notification is executed. Thus, by grasping the timing at which the special notification is executed, it is possible to obtain an effect that makes it easier for the player to understand how much the special notification is for the special information that is the subject of the grant determination. .

  In addition, after one piece of special information is subject to grant determination, the time until the special information different from the one special information is subject to grant judgment may be irregular. . In this regard, in this feature, the timing at which the special notification is executed is associated with the order in which the special information is to be determined. As a result, even if the time from when one grant determination is made until the next grant determination is irregular, when special notification is executed, which special information is the special notification Can be understood well by the player.

Feature A3. There is a limited period during which the execution of the grant determination by the privilege granting unit is limited (a period when the game is being transferred to the opening / closing execution mode, a period when the game is being executed),
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or A2, wherein the special notification control means executes the special notification during the restriction period.

  According to the feature A3, the special notification is executed in the limited period in which the grant determination is not performed by the grant determination unit. Even if the execution timing of the special notification and the execution timing of the grant determination are associated with each other, if the grant determination and the special notification are executed at the same time, it is determined which special information the player is the special alert for. The occurrence of inconvenience that cannot be understood is considered. Because, when the grant determination and the special notification are executed at the same time, the special notification is for the special information that is the target of the grant determination in the predetermined order from the previous grant determination, or from the present grant determination This is because it is conceivable that it is difficult for the player to determine whether the information is for the special information that is subject to the grant determination in a predetermined order. In this regard, in this feature, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience due to the special notification being executed in the limited period.

  Feature A4. The special notification control means executes the special notification in a predetermined game period (opening / closing execution mode in the first embodiment, special game times in the third embodiment) and the predetermined special Any of the features A1 to A3, wherein the timing of executing the special notification is changed in the predetermined game period in correspondence with the timing at which the information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determining means. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature A4, the timing at which the special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the hold information is determined to be given. The special notification is executed during a predetermined game period. When the special notification is executed by executing the special notification in a predetermined game period, the player only needs to know when the special notification is executed in the predetermined game period. As a result, it becomes easier for the player to know when the special notification is executed, and when the special notification is executed, the player knows which is the special information corresponding to the special notification. The effect which becomes easy to do is acquired.

Feature A5. In the game period, the operation mode in the notifying unit or the game operation execution unit (big prize opening 32a) different from the notification means is the first on the front side of the specific mode across the execution of the specific mode (closed state of the big prize port 32a). 1 period (round in the opening and closing execution mode) and a second period on the rear side (round after the round corresponding to the first period in the opening and closing execution mode),
The special notification control means executes the special notification in the first period when the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means is the first timing, and The feature A4 is characterized in that the special notification is executed in the second period when the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the grant determination by the grant determination means is the second timing. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A5, when the player grasps the timing at which the special notification is executed, the operation mode of the notification unit or the game operation execution unit may be determined. Thereby, when the special notification is executed, it becomes easy for the player to know in which game period the special notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to increase the effect of making it easier for the player to know which special information the special notification corresponds to.

Feature A6. A variable entrance ball that is provided in the game area and has an opening (large winning opening 32a) that is sized to allow a game ball to enter, and that the opening can be switched between an open state and a closed state. Means (variable winning device 32);
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
Privilege granting means (payout device 77 and payout control device 78) for granting a privilege to a player based on the game ball entering the opening of the variable pitching means;
With
The specific mode is at least one of switching from the open state to the closed state and switching from the closed state to the open state, and the switching is interposed between the first period and the second period. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein

  According to the feature A6, a privilege is given to the player based on the game ball entering the variable pitching portion. For this reason, it is considered that the player is playing a game paying attention to the state of the variable pitching portion. In addition, the first period and the second period are separated by switching the state of the variable pitching portion. By separating the first period and the second period according to the state of the variable pitching portion where the player's attention is high, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the first period and the second period. Therefore, the effect of making it easy for the player to grasp the current period can be enhanced.

  Feature A7. The first period and the second period are one of the open state and the closed state, and the other state is interposed between the first period and the second period. A gaming machine according to Feature A6.

  According to the feature A7, the special notification is executed in one of the open state and the closed state of the variable pitching portion. Thereby, when a 1st period and a 2nd period are divided | segmented, it will be divided | segmented on both sides of one state of an open state and a closed state. By dividing the first period and the second period across one state, the division of each period can be clarified. As a result, when the special notification is executed, it is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp in which period the special notification is executed.

Feature A8. The predetermined game period includes a plurality of periods including the first period and the second period, and the number of periods included is smaller than the number of the special information that can be stored in the acquired information storage unit. Is,
A part of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period is characterized in that the number of the special information associated with the execution timing of the special notification is different from the other periods. The gaming machine according to any one of A5 to A7.

  According to the feature A8, the number of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period is smaller than the number of special information that can be stored. Here, when one piece of special information is associated with one piece of time, it is conceivable that a problem may occur in which special information that is not a target of special notification is generated. In this regard, in this feature, by providing periods with different numbers of corresponding special information, a plurality of special information can be associated with one period. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the above problems.

  In addition, when the number of special information corresponding to the period differs, and when it is desired to provide detailed notification of the timing at which the special information is subject to determination, the number of special information corresponding to the period is reduced and the special information is added. When it is not necessary to report the timing to be determined in detail, the number of special information corresponding to the period may be increased. As a result, it is possible to provide special information that allows the player to clearly grasp the timing that is the subject of the grant determination while making a plurality of special information correspond to one period.

Feature A9. The destination specifying means performs a first process (first hold by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing the specific process on the special information that is smaller than the number of the plurality of periods included in the predetermined game period. When the special information corresponds to the given information, the total of the special information that is the target of the specific process is Executing the second process for executing the specific process so as to be greater than the number of the plurality of periods (a function for executing the determination process in the confirmation process for the second hold notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) And
The special notification control means executes the special notification corresponding to the first process so that one special information corresponds to one period, and the special notification corresponding to the second process. Is executed so that a plurality of pieces of the special information correspond to the one period. The gaming machine according to feature A8,

  According to the feature A9, one period corresponds to one special information until the special notification corresponding to the special information specified that the special information corresponding to the given information is stored is executed. . Moreover, about the subsequent special alerting | reporting, one period respond | corresponds to several special information. Thereby, when each of the first process and the second process is executed, the special notification is executed even if the number of periods included in the game period is smaller than the total of the special information subjected to each process. It becomes possible.

  The special notification corresponding to the first process corresponds to one special information in one period, and the special notification corresponding to the second process corresponds to a plurality of special information in one period. Here, the special information that is a specific target in the first process becomes a target for determination of grant at an earlier timing than the special information that is the specific target in the second process. Further, when the special notification is executed, the player wants to know in detail which special information the special notification corresponds to the special information that is subject to the grant determination at an early timing. In this regard, according to this feature, since the special notification corresponding to the first process corresponds to one special information in one period, the player details which special information corresponds to the special notification. Can grasp.

  In addition, since the special notification corresponding to the second process corresponds to a plurality of special information in one period, in order to execute the special notification corresponding to the first process, all of the storable special information is specified in advance. It is possible to prevent the device from becoming a target of specific processing of the means.

Feature A10. In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determination means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the notification means or a display means different from the notification means as one game time,
The special notification control means includes a timing at which the predetermined special information, which has been specified by the destination specifying means, is a target for grant determination by the grant determination means, and a period of time that has elapsed since one game is started. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, wherein the special notification is executed in the game times.

  According to the feature A10, the special notification is executed by associating the period that has elapsed since the start of the game times with the timing that is the target of the grant determination by the grant determination unit. Thereby, when special alerting | reporting is performed, a player can be made to grasp | ascertain which special alerting | reporting is with respect to which special information.

  Moreover, the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is displayed by executing the game times. For this reason, when game times are being executed, it is considered that the player's attention to the game is increasing. By executing the special notification in this case, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the timing at which the special notification is executed.

  In order to make the player understand that the special notification has been executed, it is preferable to execute the display of the variation of the pattern and the special notification by a common notification means. In this configuration, it is expected that the player can easily grasp the execution of the special notification while grasping the change display of the pattern.

Feature A11. In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determination means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. A game time control means (a function for executing a game time control process by the main control device 81) for controlling the notification means or a display means different from the notification means as one game time,
The game times control means is for executing the display of variation of the pattern in a plurality of variation display areas, and sequentially stopping and displaying the variation display of the patterns in the plurality of variation display areas,
The special notification control means includes a timing at which the predetermined special information, which has been specified by the destination specifying means, is to be given by the grant judging means, and a variable display of the pattern among the plurality of variable display areas. The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein the special notification is executed in the game times in association with the number of variable display areas in which the game is performed.

  According to the feature A11, the special notification is executed by associating the number of the variable display areas in which the variable display of the pattern is performed with the timing at which the special information is determined to be given. Thereby, for the player, when the special notification is executed, it is only necessary to grasp the number of the variable display areas in which the pattern is displayed in a variable manner. As a result, if the change display of the pattern is visually recognized so as to grasp the result of the grant determination in the current game round, it is possible to grasp which special information is the special notification when the special notification is executed. As described above, it is not necessary to perform an operation different from the operation of grasping the result of the grant determination in order to grasp which special information the player is informing.

  Feature A12. The notification means is a special in which the notification mode is determined by the special notification control means regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information that is specified by the destination specifying means is the target of the determination by the assignment determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, further comprising a notification unit (special display device 48).

  According to the feature A12, the notification mode by the special notification unit is not affected by the timing at which the special information is subjected to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Thereby, it is not necessary to set a plurality of types of notification modes in the special notification means in association with the timings to be given for the determination. As a result, the amount of information related to the control of the special notification means can be reduced.

  In addition, since it is possible to allow the player to know which special information is for the special notification at the timing when the special notification is executed, it is not notified which special information is for the special information in the notification mode. In any case, it is possible to prevent the player from understanding which special information the special notification is for.

  In addition, since it is possible to grasp which special information is notified by the prior specifying means for which special information at the timing when the special notification is executed, even if it is a special notification for which special information, the special information being executed The notification mode of notification can be shared. Thereby, the information amount concerning execution of special information can be reduced.

Feature A13. As the special notification, a first special notification and a second special notification are set,
When the special notification is executed, each of the first special notification and the second special notification is executed,
The special notification control means includes
First special notification control means for executing the first special notification (special light emission processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) according to the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Function)
Second special notification control means (a function for executing a special display process by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for executing the second special notification after the first special notification is executed by the first special notification control means; ,
With
The first special notification control means determines the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant by the grant determination means.
The second special notification control unit is configured to determine the content of the second special notification based on a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of the grant by the grant determination unit. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A12.

  According to the feature A13, the content of the first special notification is determined regardless of the timing at which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant. The content of the second special notification is determined according to the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination.

  By determining the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination, the content of the first special alert can be made common regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination. . As a result, the amount of information related to the execution of the first special notification can be reduced. In addition, since the timing at which the first special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the determination is made, by understanding the timing at which the first special notification is executed, any special information can be notified. The player can grasp whether there is.

  Here, even if the first special notification is executed, if the first special notification is suddenly executed, it is conceivable that the player cannot understand at which timing the first special notification is executed. In this regard, in this feature, the second special notification is executed after the first special notification is executed. The contents of the second special notification differ depending on the timing at which the special information is subject to determination. Thereby, by grasping the contents of the second special notice, the player can grasp which special information the special notice corresponds to. Further, by executing the second special notification after the first special notification, the player can understand that the second special notification is executed when the first special notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from grasping the second special notification, for example, overlooking the second special notification.

Feature A14. There is a limited period during which the grant determination by the privilege granting unit is limited (period in which the opening / closing execution mode is shifted, period in which game times are being executed),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the destination specifying unit executes a specific process in the restriction period.

  According to the feature A14, the specific process by the destination specifying unit is executed in the restriction period in which the determination of the grant is not performed by the grant determining unit. As a result, the specific process by the destination specifying unit and the grant determination by the grant determination unit are performed at the same time, and an excessive processing load on the gaming machine can be suppressed.

  Feature A15. Limiting means for restricting execution of the specific processing by the destination specifying means when the determination by the grant determining means is performed (for each holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the first embodiment) A function for determining whether or not the open / close execution mode is in the confirmation process, whether the confirmation process execution flag is stored in the confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the third embodiment The gaming machine according to Feature A14, further comprising:

  According to the feature A15, when the grant determination by the privilege grant unit is executed, the execution of the specific process by the destination specifying unit is restricted. Thereby, it can suppress that the grant determination by a privilege provision means and the specific process by a destination specific means are performed simultaneously. As a result, the excellent effect described in the feature A14 can be obtained favorably.

Feature A16. The grant determination means includes a high-probability grant determination means (function for executing the processing of step S703 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) and a low-probability grant determination means (main And the function of executing the process of step S702 in the MPU 202 of the control device 81, and further, after the result of the grant determination becomes the grant correspondence result, until a predetermined number of grant determinations are made. The grant determination by the high probability grant determination means is performed, and the grant determination by the low probability grant determination means is performed after the grant determination of the number of times is performed,
The game according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein the destination specifying unit performs the specific process on special information for which a determination is made by the high-probability giving determination unit. Machine.

  According to the feature A16, the destination specifying unit performs a specific process on the special information that is the target of the determination by the high probability determination unit. Thereby, when executing a specific process, whether the special information that is the target of the specific process is to be subjected to the grant determination by the grant determination means of the high probability grant determination means and the low probability grant determination means, There is no need to judge each time. As a result, when the specific process is executed, the specific process by the destination specifying unit is executed as compared with the configuration in which the specific information is subject to the determination of the grant by each grant determination unit. The processing load in case can be reduced.

Feature B1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (round display start process and special effect round display process in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 of the first embodiment), which is executed by the display apparatus 48), the second embodiment A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the mid-variation process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
With
In the destination specifying means, the specification result of the specific process executed first is a switching target result (determined as a big win in the success / failure determination process in the confirmation process for the first hold notice). Based on the special information (the hold information that is the object of the determination in the confirmation process for each hold notice in the first embodiment) and the specific process thereafter At least one of the execution modes (a function for executing the determination process corresponding to the high probability mode or the determination process corresponding to the low probability mode in the confirmation process for the second hold notice in the second embodiment) A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching (a function for executing a confirmation process for second hold notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81).

  According to the feature B1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the target of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the target of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Based on the fact that the specific result has become the switching target result, the special information to be executed for the subsequent specific process and the execution mode of the specific process are switched. As a result, it is possible to diversify the specific processing when the switching target result is obtained and the timing at which the specific processing is executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the monotonous processing mode and timing when the specific processing is executed, and to increase the player's attention to the game.

  Feature B2. The destination specifying means executes the specific processing corresponding to the switching target result before the special information that is the switching target result is the target of the grant determination. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, which is characterized.

  According to the feature B2, the specific process corresponding to the switching target result is executed before the special information that is the switching target result is the target of the determination to be given. This makes it possible to execute a specific process based on the result of the switching target at an early timing.

  Feature B3. The destination specifying means executes the specific process with a predetermined number of the special information as an upper limit, and the special information that is the target of the specific process when the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to feature B1 or B2, characterized in that

  According to the feature B3, when the switching target result is obtained, it is possible to increase the number of special information to be subjected to specific processing. By varying the number of the hold information that is the target of the specific process according to the result of the specific process, it is possible to diversify the pattern when the specific process is executed. As a result, the player can play a game paying attention to the number of special information to be subjected to a specific process, and can increase the degree of attention to the game.

  Feature B4. The special notification control means includes the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to the feature B3, wherein the special notification based on is executed in a distinguishable manner.

  According to the feature B4, by grasping the special notification, the player can grasp whether or not the special information to be subjected to the specific processing by the first specifying unit is increasing. Thereby, the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is executed, respectively. This makes it possible for the player to grasp this fact.

  Feature B5. The special notification control means includes the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. The gaming machine according to the feature B4, wherein the special notification based on each is executed as a common notification mode.

  According to the feature B5, the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying unit until the switching target result is obtained and the special notification based on the specific process by the destination specifying unit after the switching target result is obtained are common. It is a notification mode. Thereby, in order to perform special alerting | reporting, the information amount memorize | stored previously can be reduced.

  When the notification mode of the special notification is common, the special notification based on the specific processing by the destination specifying means until the switching target result is obtained, and the specific processing by the destination specifying means after the switching target result is obtained. What is necessary is just to make the timing which performs special alerting differ, for example with special alerting based on.

Feature B6. As the special notification, a first special notification and a second special notification are set,
When the special notification is executed, each of the first special notification and the second special notification is executed,
The special notification control means includes
First special notification control means for executing the first special notification (special light emission processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 is executed) according to the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of application by the application determination unit. Function)
A second special notification control means (a function for executing a special display process by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) for executing the second special notification;
With
The first special notification control means determines the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the predetermined special information is subject to the determination of grant by the grant determination means.
The second special notification control unit is configured to determine the content of the second special notification based on a timing at which the predetermined special information is a target of the determination of application by the application determination unit. A gaming machine according to B4 or B5.

  According to the feature B6, the content of the first special notification is determined regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to determination. The content of the second special notification is determined according to the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination.

  By determining the content of the first special notification regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination, the content of the first special alert can be made common regardless of the timing at which the special information is subject to grant determination. . As a result, the amount of information related to the execution of the first special notification can be reduced. In addition, since the timing at which the first special notification is executed corresponds to the timing at which the determination is made, by understanding the timing at which the first special notification is executed, any special information can be notified. The player can grasp whether there is.

  Here, even if the first special notification is executed, it is conceivable that the player cannot understand at which timing the first special notification is executed. In this regard, in this feature, the second special notification is executed in which the content differs depending on the timing at which the special information is to be given. Thereby, by grasping the contents of the second special notice, the player can grasp which special information the special notice corresponds to.

Feature B7. The switching target result is that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is determined as the grant correspondence result,
The special notification control unit is configured to execute the special notification when a result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result, and further, the grant by the specific process by the destination specifying unit. After it is specified that the special information corresponding to the correspondence result is stored, it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored again by the specific processing by the destination specifying unit. The special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later corresponds to the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B6, characterized in that the probability of being executed is lower than that of the special notification.

  According to the feature B7, the special notification is executed when the result of the grant determination by the grant determining unit is the grant correspondence result. In addition, the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result later than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result earlier by the destination specifying means. The probability of being executed is lower. Thereby, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the special notification based on the special information previously identified as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed. In addition, there is an effect that the player can expect that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stored even if the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is not executed later. It is done.

  Here, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is executed when the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is the subject of the grant determination. Can be done. For this reason, even if the probability that the special notification about the special information identified later corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed is set to be low, an opportunity to execute the special notification about the special information is provided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the frequency at which the special notification related to the special information is executed from becoming extremely low.

Feature B8. The grant determination means is configured to change a probability that the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result until the grant determination is performed a specific number of times after the grant determination result becomes the grant correspondence result. ,
The switching target result is that the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means is determined as the grant correspondence result,
In the case where it is determined that the result of the specific process corresponds to the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result, the destination specifying unit further determines that the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the specific number of times in view of the special information. The gaming machine according to any one of the characteristics B3 to B7, wherein the specific process is executed on the special information that is a target of the determination of the grant before the execution.

  According to the feature B8, after the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit becomes the grant correspondence result, the probability of the grant correspondence result is changed until a predetermined number of grant determinations are executed. If the result of the specific processing by the first specifying means corresponds to the grant correspondence result, the special subject to the grant judgment before the special number of grant judgment is executed in view of the special information corresponding to the particular result Specific processing is performed on the information. In other words, when it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored by the first specifying means, the probability that the special correspondence information is subject to the grant determination and then the probability of the grant correspondence result is changed The special information that is the target of the specific process by the pre-specifying unit increases so that the specific process by the pre-specifying unit is executed for the special information that is the target of the grant determination.

  When the probability of the assignment correspondence result is changed, it is considered that the player plays the game paying attention to the result of the assignment determination. In this regard, this feature can increase the chance that special notification is executed for special information that increases the degree of attention of the player to the game. Thereby, it becomes possible to raise the player's attention to the special notification.

Feature B9. The grant determination means changes the probability of the grant correspondence result when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
In the case where the result of the specific process corresponds to the establishment of the predetermined condition, the destination specifying unit responds to a change in the probability that the subsequent specific process becomes the grant correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the gaming machine is executed.

  According to the feature B9, when the result of the specific process by the first specifying unit corresponds to the establishment of a predetermined condition corresponding to the change in the probability of being the assignment correspondence result, the probability of being the assignment correspondence result is changed. A specific process is performed by the corresponding point specifying means. Thereby, even if the probability of the assignment correspondence result may be changed, the specific process by the first specifying unit can be executed satisfactorily.

Feature B10. As the special notification, when executed, a plurality of types with different expectations corresponding to the special correspondence result corresponding to the grant correspondence result are set,
The special notification control means determines that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored by the specific processing by the destination specifying means, and then again performs the specific processing by the destination specifying means. When it is specified that the special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result is stored, the special notification corresponding to the special information specified later as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is first described above. The degree of expectation corresponding to the provision correspondence result is lower than that of the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the provision correspondence result. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B9.

  According to the feature B10, the special notification is executed when the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit is the grant correspondence result. In addition, the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result later than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant response result earlier by the destination specifying means. The one with the lower expectation degree corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed. As a result, the special notification based on the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result was supported rather than the special notification based on the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later. It is possible to increase the player's attention to the special information.

  Here, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is executed when the special information previously identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is the subject of the grant determination. Can be done. For this reason, the special notification regarding the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result later is selected even if the low expectation level corresponding to the grant correspondence result is selected. Is provided, the player's attention to the special information can be increased later.

  Feature B11. The special notification control means responds to the grant correspondence result after the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is subjected to grant determination by the grant determination means. When the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as being performed is performed, the degree of expectation corresponding to the grant correspondence result is higher than that of the special notification performed immediately before the special information The gaming machine according to Feature B10, wherein:

  According to the feature B11, when the special notification corresponding to the special information identified later as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is executed again, it corresponds to the assignment correspondence result rather than the special notification executed previously. The one with high expectation is executed. Thereby, a player's attention degree with respect to the special information specified as corresponding to a provision correspondence result later can be raised. As a result, when the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is executed, the player pays attention to the special notification, and the special information is subject to the grant determination. When it becomes, the player pays attention to the special information identified as corresponding to the assignment correspondence result later. Therefore, when multiple special notifications are executed, it is possible to cause the player to expect that the special information that is subject to the grant determination corresponds to the grant determination result.

  As described above, the special notification corresponding to the special correspondence information is executed after the special notification corresponding to the special information identified as corresponding to the grant correspondence result is executed. It is possible to suppress the player's attention to the result of the assignment determination for the special information specified as being previously corresponding to the assignment correspondence result, and to reduce the player's attention level. As a result, when the special notification is executed a plurality of times, it is possible to suppress the player's attention level from becoming sufficiently high for one special notification (special notification executed first).

Feature C1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (round display start process and special effect round display process in the MPU 252 of the display control apparatus 212 of the first embodiment), which is executed by the display apparatus 48), the second embodiment A function of executing the variable display control process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 and the mid-variation process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 of the third embodiment),
In the notifying means or a specific notifying means different from the notifying means, after the change display of the pattern is started, the result corresponding to the result of the application determination by the application determining means is displayed and the display of the change of the pattern is terminated. Game time control means for controlling the notification means or specific notification means different from the notification means (function for executing game time control processing by the main control device 81),
With
The grant determination means includes a high probability grant determination means (function of executing the processing of step S703 in the MPU 202 of the main controller 81) and a low probability grant determination means (main If the MPU 202 of the control device 81 has a function of executing the process of step S702 and the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result corresponding to the first grant information, When the grant determination is performed by the high-probability grant determination means after the grant determination, and the result of the grant determination is a second grant correspondence result corresponding to the second grant information, The grant determination by the low probability grant determination means is performed later,
The destination specifying means can specify which of the first grant information and the second grant information corresponds to the special information,
When the result of the grant determination is the first grant correspondence result, the game times control means finally displays the first grant picture or the combination of the first grant pictures as a result corresponding to the grant judgment result. And when the result of the grant determination is a second grant correspondence result, as a result corresponding to the grant decision result, the second grant pattern or a combination of the second grant patterns is finally stopped and displayed.
Further, it is specified that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored in the acquired information storage means by the destination specifying means, and the special information is again before the assignment determination target. When it is specified by the destination specifying means that the special information corresponding to the assignment correspondence result is stored in the acquired information storage means, the destination specifying means first specifies that it corresponds to the assignment correspondence result. When the special information is the target of the grant determination, regardless of whether the grant determination result is the first grant correspondence result or the second grant correspondence result, the first grant picture or the A gaming machine characterized in that a combination of first assigned pictures is finally stopped and displayed.

  According to the feature C1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  When it is specified that special information corresponding to a plurality of grant correspondence results is stored by the destination specifying means, among the plurality of special information, the special information that is subject to grant determination first is the subject of grant determination. In this case, regardless of whether the result is the first grant correspondence result or the second grant correspondence result, the first design or the combination of the first design is displayed as a final stop. As a result, it is possible to increase the frequency at which the first pattern or the combination of the first pattern is finally stopped and displayed. In this way, the number of times that the first pattern or the combination of the first pattern is finally stopped and displayed increases the interest of the game, or increases the willingness to continue the game because there are many opportunities to be given benefits. It is conceivable that the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  Further, since the second destination specifying means specifies that the special information corresponding to the grant information is stored, the special information identified as corresponding to the grant information by the first destination specifying means is given. In this state, the special information corresponding to the given information is already stored in the acquired information storage means. For this reason, even if the special information identified as corresponding to the grant information by the first destination identification means is the subject of grant determination, even if the first picture or the first picture combination is finally stopped and displayed, Then, it can suppress that the timing used as a provision determination result becomes late. Thereby, while increasing the frequency at which the first design or the combination of the first design is finally stopped and displayed, the second design or the combination of the second design when the first design or the combination of the first design is finally displayed is stopped. Superiority over the last stop display can be secured.

Feature D1. Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (entrance to each operation port 33, 34) (function of executing information acquisition processing in MPU 202 of main controller 81) When,
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In such a case, a grant determination unit (a function for executing the determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) that sequentially performs the grant determination on the plurality of special information,
A privilege granting unit (main control) that grants a privilege to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination unit being the grant response result that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. A function of executing a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the device 81),
A destination for identifying information that reflects a determination result when the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit is a target of the determination of grant at a timing before the special information is a target of the determination of grant Specifying means (function of executing confirmation processing for holding notice in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81);
The special notification based on the specifying result by the destination specifying means is notified at a timing before the special information that is the target to be specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination (symbol display device 41, special Special notification control means (function to execute round display start processing and special effect in-round display processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) to be executed by the display device 48);
With
The special notification control means is the second special information as the special information and the second special information to be given by the grant judging means after the first special information is given by the grant judging means. When executing the special notification for the special information, the content of the special notification corresponding to the second special information is determined according to the content of the special notification corresponding to the first special information. A gaming machine characterized by being.

  According to the feature D1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not subject to the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is subject to the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, when the special notification for the second special information is executed after the special notification for the first special information is executed, the second special information is changed according to the content of the special notification for the first special information that has been executed. The content of the corresponding special notification is determined. Thereby, when the special alerting | reporting with respect to 1st special information is performed, a player pays attention to the content. As a result, the player's attention to the game can be increased.

  Furthermore, after the special notification corresponding to the first special information is executed, until the special notification corresponding to the second special information is executed, the player is assumed to maintain the state of grasping the content. As a result, the period during which the player is paying attention to the contents of the special notification can be lengthened.

Feature E1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination specifying means for specifying (a function of executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the sixth embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) To execute the special notification control means (steps S3106 to S3108 by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the sixth embodiment and round display start processing in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212). Function)
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The information is made different in correspondence with the order of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant response result. Specific control means for changing the execution frequency of the special notification that becomes the execution mode of the special notification or the predetermined notification mode depending on whether or not it exists (function of executing the round display start process in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the sixth embodiment) )
As the specific gaming state, a high-expected specific gaming state that proceeds in a situation where the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination executed after the end of the specific gaming state can be relatively increased, and a relative There is a specific game state with low expectation that progresses in a situation that can be reduced in number,
The special notification during the specific game state by the specific control means is executed in the specific game state with the high expectation level, but is not executed in the specific game state with the low expectation level.

  According to the characteristic E1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the order in which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is to be given after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, since the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification differs depending on whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence result, the special information can be provided by grasping the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification. Whether or not it corresponds to the result can be specified. Thereby, the attention degree to special alerting | reporting can be raised.

  In such a configuration, in a specific game state with a low expectation degree that the special information corresponds to the grant correspondence result, the special information is difficult to perform special notification of the execution mode corresponding to the grant correspondence result. Or the execution frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed does not change easily. For this reason, the special notification of the execution mode in which the special information does not correspond to the assignment correspondence result is repeatedly executed, or the execution frequency does not change, and the special notification is likely to be monotonous.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification by the special control means is executed only in the specific game state with high expectation, and is not executed in the specific game state with low expectation. A monotonous thing can be suppressed and the fall of the attention degree to the game resulting from the said special alert | report becoming monotonous can be suppressed.

Feature E2. As the mode of the grant determination, there are a high probability mode and a low probability mode in which the probability that the determination result by the grant determination means becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively high and low,
The specific game state with high expectation is a specific game state in which the mode of the grant determination executed after the end of the specific game state is the high probability mode,
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the specific game state with low expectation is a specific game state in which the mode of the grant determination executed after the end of the specific game state is the low probability mode.

  According to the feature E2, in the high-probability mode specific gaming state, the probability that the special information becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively high, and therefore the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination can be relatively large. On the other hand, in the specific game state for the low probability mode, since the probability that the special information becomes the grant correspondence result is relatively low, the special information that becomes the grant correspondence result in the grant determination can be relatively low.

  In such a configuration, the special notification by the special control means is executed only in the specific game state for the high probability mode and is not executed in the specific game state for the low probability mode, so that the effect of the feature E1 can be achieved.

Feature E3. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
A starting ball entry portion (each of the operation ports 33 and 34) provided in the game area and capable of entering a game ball flowing down the game area;
With
In the starting entrance part,
A first starting entrance (upper working port 33);
A second starting ball entrance (lower working port 34) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state;
Is included,
The information acquisition means acquires the special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered one of the start ball entering sections as the acquisition condition,
An opening / closing control means (a function for executing the electric power support process) for controlling the second starting entrance part so that the opening / closing operation is performed in a predetermined operation mode in the second starting entrance part;
As the operation modes, there are a high expectation mode (high frequency support mode) and a low expectation mode (low frequency support mode) in which the degree of expectation of entering the second starting entrance portion is relatively high or low. ,
The high expectation specific game state is a specific game state when the operation mode is the high expectation mode and the state is shifted to the specific game state,
The gaming machine according to Feature E1, wherein the specific game state with low expectation is a specific game state when the operation mode is the low expectation mode and transitions to the specific game state.

  According to the feature E3, it is assumed that the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage unit in the low expectation aspect is smaller than that in the high expectation aspect. As a result, when the operation mode shifts to the specific game state in a situation where the mode of low expectation is the mode, it is expected that the number of special information to be specified by the first specifying means is small, and the special result corresponding to the grant correspondingly Information can be less. Therefore, it can be said that the specific game state in the case where the operation mode is the low expectation mode and the game state is shifted to the specific game state is the low expectation specific game state.

  On the other hand, in the situation where the operation mode is a high expectation mode, it is expected that the number of special information to be specified by the first specifying means is relatively large, and the corresponding correspondence result There can be a lot of special information. Thereby, it can be said that the specific game state in the case where the operation mode is the high expectation mode and the game state is shifted to the specific game state is the high expectation specific game state.

Feature E4. The acquired information storage means includes
First acquisition information storage means for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the first starting entrance part with the first prescribed number as the upper limit (first result display part hold) Area Ra)
Second acquisition information storage means (second result display section on-hold) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means when the game ball enters the second starting entrance part with the second prescribed number as an upper limit Area Rb)
With
The feature determination means according to claim E3, wherein the assignment determination means performs the assignment determination with respect to each of the special information stored in the first acquisition information storage means or the second acquisition information storage means. Game machines.

  According to the feature E4, since the first prescribed number and the second prescribed number are set separately, the maximum number of special information acquired in the situation where the second starting ball-in part is in an open state, The maximum number of special information acquired in the situation where the second starting entrance part is in a closed state will be substantially different. This clearly causes a difference in the number of special information when shifting to the specific gaming state.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration such as the feature E1, the special notification can be executed only when the special notification can be suitably performed.

Feature E5. Non-special notification executing means for executing a series of non-special notifications different from the special notification over a specific number of execution periods (steps in the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) during the low-expected specific gaming state. S3302 to step S3305)
The feature number E3 or feature feature E4 is characterized in that the specific number is set to be larger than an expected number that is expected to be acquired by the information acquisition means in a situation where the operation mode is the low expectation mode. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to feature E5, in a specific game state with a low expectation level, instead of special notification, a series of non-special notifications are executed to suppress a decrease in attention to a game that may be caused by the absence of special notification. can do.

  In addition, since the non-special notification is a series of operations performed over a specific number of execution periods, the non-special notification is continuous over a long period that cannot be set by special notification performed individually for each execution period. The production can be set as non-special notification. Thereby, the freedom degree of a non-special alert | report can be raised and the attention degree to a non-special alert | report can be raised.

  In particular, since the specific number is set to be larger than the expected number, the execution period in which non-special notification is executed is longer than the execution period in which special notification related to special information for the expected number is performed. Thereby, the freedom degree of non-special alert | report can be raised more suitably.

  Here, according to the feature E1 or the like, since the special notification is not executed in the specific game state with low expectation, the period for performing the special notification in the specific game state can be used as the period for performing the non-special notification. it can. Thereby, a specific number of execution periods longer than the expected number of execution periods can be secured.

  According to the relationship with the feature E4, a configuration in which “the expected number is the first specified number” can be considered.

Feature E6. There is provided an effect execution means (symbol display device 41) which has a display area and performs a predetermined effect in the display area during the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the specific control means performs the special notification by changing a progress of an effect displayed in the display area.

  According to the feature E6, the special notification is performed when the progress of the effect displayed in the display area is different. Thereby, if attention is paid to the predetermined effect performed during the specific game state, the special notification is naturally visually recognized. Therefore, the inconvenience that the special notification is missed can be avoided.

  Further, since the special notification is not performed in the specific game state with a low expectation level, a predetermined effect is performed in the display area. Thereby, in a specific game state with a low expectation level, a predetermined effect can be suitably shown. Therefore, the predetermined effect and the special notification can be suitably executed, and the degree of attention to the game to the specific game state can be further increased.

Feature E7. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed over a plurality of specific times (8 times).
The game machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein an execution period for executing the special notification corresponds to a period for executing a round game.

  According to the feature E7, it is possible to grasp the execution period during which the special notification is performed by grasping the round game. Thereby, when special notification is performed, it becomes easy to grasp in which execution period the special notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the order in which the grant determination is performed for the special information related to the special notification, and it is possible to closely associate the round game and the special notification.

Feature F1. Information acquisition means (a function for executing information acquisition processing in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 232) for storing the special information acquired by the information acquisition means as an upper limit of a predetermined number as a plurality of numbers;
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order (a function for executing the pass / fail determination process in the variation start process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means (function to execute a game state transition process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81),
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A destination identifying means for identifying (a function for executing a confirmation process for holding notice by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 in the seventh embodiment);
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is performed by the notification means (symbol display device 41) at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the target of the grant determination. ) And a special notification control means (function for executing round effect determination processing by the MPU 202 of the main control device 81 and round display start processing by the MPU 252 of the display control device 212) in the seventh embodiment. ,
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The information is made different in correspondence with the order of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant response result. Specific control means for changing the execution frequency of the special notification or the execution frequency of the special notification to be a predetermined notification mode depending on whether or not there is a first hold in the round display start processing of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment With a function to execute a notice effect)
The special notification during the specific gaming state by the specific control means is when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is greater than a predetermined specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state However, the game machine is not executed when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than or equal to the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific game state.

  According to the feature F1, the special notification according to the predetermined special information that is not the subject of the grant determination is executed by the notifying unit at a timing before the special information is the subject of the grant determination. is there. As a result, for the player, when special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, the result when the special information that is the target of the grant determination later becomes the target of the grant determination is determined according to the content of the special notification. The game of confirming or predicting the game is added and the game is diversified. As a result, the degree of attention of the game can be increased.

  Further, the execution period during which the special notification is executed is different in correspondence with the order in which the special information is subjected to the determination of grant after the end of the specific gaming state. As a result, by grasping the execution period during which the special notification is executed, it is possible to specify the order in which the special information related to the special notification is to be given after the end of the specific gaming state.

  Furthermore, since the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification differs depending on whether or not the special information corresponds to the assignment correspondence result, the special information can be provided by grasping the execution mode or execution frequency of the special notification. Whether or not it corresponds to the result can be specified. Thereby, the attention degree to special alerting | reporting can be raised.

  In such a configuration, when the number of special information acquired in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state is small, the frequency of special notification is reduced, and the degree of expectation that special information corresponding to the grant correspondence result exists Becomes lower. For this reason, the frequency with which special alerting | reporting is performed may fall, and the problem that special alerting | reporting will become monotonous may arise.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the special notification by the special control means is executed only when the number of special information acquired in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state is greater than the specific number, and the specific number or less. In such a case, since it is not executed, it is possible to avoid the above inconvenience and to suppress a decrease in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F2. The specific control means is a first specific control means,
In the specific gaming state, the special notification control means is in the specific gaming state when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 1 or more and not more than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. Second specific control means for performing the special notification related to one special information over a plurality of execution periods (execution of the second hold notice effect in the round display start process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment) The gaming machine according to Feature F1, further comprising:

  According to the feature F2, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 1 or more and less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification by the second specific control means Is done. The execution period of the special notification by the second specific control means is set longer than the execution period of the special notification by the first specific control means. Thereby, even if there is little special information, the period during which special alerting | reporting is performed can be lengthened, and the attention degree to a game can be raised.

  In addition, since the execution period of the special notification by the second specific control unit is set to be long, an execution mode that requires a relatively long period of time for the story to progress is executed by the second specific control unit. It becomes possible to set to an aspect. Thereby, the freedom degree of the execution aspect of the special alerting | reporting by a 2nd specific control means can be raised, and the attention degree to the special alerting | reporting by a 2nd specific control means can be raised.

  Feature F3. The special notification control means does not perform the special notification when the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 0 in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2.

  According to the feature F3, when there is no special information stored in the acquired information storage unit in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification is not executed. Thereby, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the special notification is executed even though the special information is not stored.

  Feature F4. When the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of transitioning to the specific gaming state, a series of non-special notifications different from the special notification is made more than the specific number. Non-special notification execution means (a function for executing a normal round effect in the round display start process of the MPU 252 of the display control device 212 in the seventh embodiment) executed over a large specified number of execution periods The gaming machine according to Feature F1, characterized by:

  According to feature F4, when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than or equal to the specific number in the situation of transition to the specific gaming state, a series of non-special notifications are executed instead of the special notification. It is possible to suppress a decrease in attention to the game that may be caused by the absence of special notification.

  In addition, since the non-special notification is a series of events performed over a specified number of execution periods, the non-special notification is not performed for a long period of time that cannot be set by the special notification performed individually for each execution period. It can be set as a special notification. Thereby, the freedom degree of a non-special alert | report can be raised and the attention degree to a non-special alert | report can be raised.

  In particular, since the specified number is set to be larger than the specific number, the execution period in which the non-special notification is executed is longer than the execution period in which the special notification related to the specific number of special information is performed. Thereby, the freedom degree of non-special alert | report can be raised more suitably.

  Here, according to the feature F1, since the special notification is not executed if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state, the special notification is performed in the specific gaming state. The period for performing the notification can be used as a period for performing the non-special notification. Thereby, a specified number of execution periods longer than the specific number of execution periods can be secured.

  Note that this feature may be applied to the feature F2 or the feature F3. In this case, “when the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state” is referred to as “the acquisition information in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. It is replaced with “when the number of the special information stored in the storage means is 0”.

Feature F5. There is provided an effect execution means (symbol display device 41) which has a display area and performs a predetermined effect in the display area during the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4, wherein the specific control unit performs the special notification by changing a progress of an effect displayed in the display area.

  According to the feature F5, the special notification is performed when the progress of the effect displayed in the display area is different. Thereby, if attention is paid to the predetermined effect performed during the specific game state, the special notification is naturally visually recognized. Therefore, the inconvenience that the special notification is missed can be avoided.

  Further, according to the relationship with the feature F4, if the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific game state, a predetermined effect is performed in the display area. Thereby, a predetermined effect can be shown suitably. Therefore, the predetermined effect and the special notification can be suitably executed, and the degree of attention to the game to the specific game state can be further increased.

Feature F6. Based on the player's launch operation, a launching means (game ball launching mechanism 53) for launching a game ball toward the game area;
Variable pitching means (variable winning device 32) provided in the game area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means (a function for executing a large winning opening opening / closing process in the MPU 202 of the main control device 81) for executing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed over a plurality of specific times (8 times).
The game machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, wherein an execution period in which the special notification is executed corresponds to a period in which a round game is executed.

  According to the feature F6, it is possible to grasp the execution period during which the special notification is performed by grasping the round game. Thereby, when special notification is performed, it becomes easy to grasp in which execution period the special notification is performed. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the order in which the grant determination is performed for the special information related to the special notification, and it is possible to closely associate the round game and the special notification.

  The configuration limited in any one of the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the configuration in any one of the features A1 to A16. The configuration limited in any one of the features A1 to A16 may be applied to the configuration in any one of the features B1 to B11. In addition, a configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16 and the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the feature C1. In addition, a configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16 and the features B1 to B11 may be applied to the feature D1. Moreover, even if the configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, and the features D1 is applied to the configuration limited by any one of the features E1 to E8. Good. Further, the configuration limited by any one of the features F1 to F6, the configuration limited by any one of the features A1 to A16, the features B1 to B11, the features C1, the features D1, and the features E1 to E8. May be applied. In these cases, further effects can be achieved by applying each configuration.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 32a ... Grand prize opening, 33 ... Upper operation opening, 34 ... Lower operation opening, 41 ... Symbol display device, 48 ... Special display device as special notification means, 53 ... Game ball launching mechanism, 81 ... Main Control device 202... MPU provided with point identification means, 203... ROM, 204... RAM, 212... Display control device, 232. 254 ... work RAM, 255 ... VDP, Ra ... first result display area reservation area, Rb ... second result display area reservation area.

Claims (6)

Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Special information acquired by the information acquisition means, an acquisition information storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a plurality of numbers,
A determination is made as to whether or not the special information stored in the acquisition information storage means corresponds to preset provision information, and a plurality of special information is stored in the acquisition information storage means In some cases, the grant determination means for sequentially performing the grant determination on the plurality of special information in a predetermined order;
The game state is shifted to a specific game state advantageous to the player based on the result of the grant determination by the grant determination means that the special information to be determined corresponds to the grant information. Transition means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
Information reflecting the determination result when the predetermined special information acquired by the information acquisition means is the target of the determination of grant at a timing prior to the predetermined special information being the target of the determination of grant. A prior identification means to identify;
The special notification reflecting the result of specification by the destination specifying means is executed by the notification means at a timing before the predetermined special information that has been specified by the destination specifying means becomes the subject of the grant determination. Special notification control means to
With
The special notification control means performs the special notification on the special information stored in the acquired information storage means during the specific gaming state, and sets an execution period for executing the special notification for the special information. The information is made different in correspondence with the order of the grant determination after the end of the specific gaming state, and the special information subject to the special notification in each execution period corresponds to the grant response result. Specific control means for varying the execution frequency of the special notification depending on whether or not the execution mode of the special notification or the predetermined notification mode is provided,
The special notification during the specific gaming state by the specific control means is when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is greater than a predetermined specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state However, the game machine is not executed when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is less than or equal to the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific game state. The specific control means is a first specific control means,
In the specific gaming state, the special notification control means is in the specific gaming state when the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 1 or more and not more than the specific number in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising a second specific control unit that performs the special notification related to one special information over a plurality of execution periods.   The special notification control means does not perform the special notification when the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is 0 in the situation of shifting to the specific gaming state. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.   When the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is equal to or less than the specific number in the situation of transitioning to the specific gaming state, a series of non-special notifications different from the special notification is made more than the specific number. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising non-special notification execution means that executes over a large specified number of execution periods. There is a display area, provided with an effect execution means for performing a predetermined effect in the display area during the specific gaming state,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the specific control unit performs the special notification by changing a progress of an effect displayed in the display area. A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation;
A variable pitching means provided in the gaming area and capable of switching between an open state and a closed state;
Variable entry control means for performing variable entry control for switching to the closed state after the variable entry means is in the open state;
With
In the specific game state, a round game in which the variable pitch control is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied is executed over a plurality of specific times.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein the execution period for executing the special notification corresponds to a period for executing a round game.

Images